Part 5

Loan Relationships
Chapter 1

Introduction

Introduction

Overview of Part
292
1
This Part sets out how profits and deficits arising to a company from its loan relationships are brought into account for corporation tax purposes.
2
For the meaning of “loan relationship” see section 302 and Part 6 (relationships treated as loan relationships etc).
3
For how such profits and deficits are calculated and brought into account, see—
a
section 296 (profits and deficits to be calculated using credits and debits given by this Part),
b
section 297 (trading credits and debits to be brought into account under Part 3),
c
section 299 (charge to tax on non-trading profits),
d
section 300 (method of bringing non-trading deficits into account),
e
section 301 (calculation of non-trading profits and deficits from loan relationships: non-trading credits and debits), and
f
Chapter 16 (non-trading deficits).
4
For the priority of this Part for corporation tax purposes, see Chapter 17.
5
This Part also contains the following Chapters (which mainly relate to the amounts to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part)—
a
Chapter 3 (the credits and debits to be brought into account: general),
b
Chapter 4 (continuity of treatment on transfers within groups or on reorganisations),
c
Chapter 5 (connected companies relationships: introduction and general),
d
Chapter 6 (connected companies relationships: impairment losses and releases of debts),
e
Chapter 7 (group relief claims involving impaired or released consortium debts),
f
Chapter 8 (connected parties relationships: late interest),
g
Chapter 9 (partnerships involving companies),
h
Chapter 10 (insurance companies),
i
Chapter 11 (other special kinds of company),
j
Chapter 12 (special rules for particular kinds of securities),
k
Chapter 13 (European cross-border transfers of business),
l
Chapter 14 (European cross-border mergers),
m
Chapter 15 (tax avoidance),
n
Chapter 18 (general and supplementary provisions).
6
This Part needs to be read with Part 19 (general exemptions).

Construction of references to profits or losses from loan relationships
293
1
In this Part references to profits or losses from loan relationships include references to profits or losses from related transactions.
2
For the meaning of “related transaction” see section 304.
3
Except where the context indicates otherwise, in this Part references to profits or losses from loan relationships include references to profits or losses of a capital nature.

Matters treated as loan relationships
294
1
Part 6 deals with matters treated for some or all purposes as loan relationships or rights, payments or profits under loan relationships.
2
Except where the context indicates otherwise, references to this Part in this Act and elsewhere in the Tax Acts include references to Part 6.

How profits and deficits from loan relationships are dealt with

General rule: profits arising from loan relationships chargeable as income
295
1
The general rule for corporation tax purposes is that all profits arising to a company from its loan relationships are chargeable to tax as income in accordance with this Part.
2
But see section 465 (exclusion of distributions except in tax avoidance cases).

Profits and deficits to be calculated using credits and debits given by this Part
296
Profits and deficits arising to a company from its loan relationships are to be calculated using the credits and debits given by this Part.

Trading credits and debits to be brought into account under Part 3
297
1
This section applies so far as in any accounting period a company is a party to a loan relationship for the purposes of a trade it carries on.
2
The credits in respect of the relationship for the period are treated as receipts of the trade which are to be brought into account in calculating its profits for that period.
3
The debits in respect of the relationship for the period are treated as expenses of the trade which are deductible in calculating those profits.
4
So far as subsection (3) provides for any amount to be deductible, it has effect despite anything in—
a
section 53 (capital expenditure),
b
section 54 (expenses not wholly and exclusively for trade and unconnected losses), or
c
section 59 (patent royalties).
5
This section is subject to—
a
section 330 (debits in respect of pre-trading expenditure),
b
section 482(1) (under which credits or debits to be brought into account under Chapter 2 of Part 6 (relevant non-lending relationships) are treated as non-trading credits or debits), and
c
sections 286(5) and 287(5) of CTA 2010 (under which some credits and debits affecting ring-fence profits from petroleum extraction activities are treated as non-trading credits and debits).

Meaning of trade and purposes of trade
298
1
For the purposes of this Part a company is taken to be a party to a creditor relationship for the purposes of a trade it carries on only if it is a party to the relationship in the course of activities forming an integral part of the trade.
2
For the meaning of “creditor relationship”, see section 302(5).
3
For the purposes of this Part activities carried on by a company in the course of—
a
any mutual trading, or
b
any mutual insurance or other mutual business which is not life assurance business, ...
c. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
are treated as not constituting the whole or any part of a trade.
4
Subsection (3) applies for the purposes of any other relevant enactment as it applies for the purposes of this Part.
5
In subsection (4) “relevant enactment” means so much of any enactment as contains provision by reference to which amounts are to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part.
6
In the case of activities carried on by a company in the course of any basic life assurance and general annuity business, provision corresponding to that made by subsection (3) is made by section 88 of FA 2012 for the purpose of applying the I - E rules.

Charge to tax on non-trading profits
299
1
The charge to corporation tax on income applies to any non-trading profits which a company has in respect of its loan relationships.
2
For the meaning of a company having such profits and how they are calculated, see section 301.

Method of bringing non-trading deficits into account
300
1
Any non-trading deficit which a company has from its loan relationships must be brought into account in accordance with Chapter 16 (non-trading deficits).
2
For the meaning of a company having such a deficit and how it is calculated, see section 301.
3
This section and Chapter 16 apply even if none of the company's loan relationships is regarded as a source of income as a result of this Part.

Calculation of non-trading profits and deficits from loan relationships: non-trading credits and debits
301
1
Whether a company has non-trading profits or a non-trading deficit from its loan relationships for an accounting period is determined in accordance with subsections (4) to (7), using the non-trading credits and non-trading debits given by this Part for the accounting period.
1A
In the case of a non-UK resident company, subsections (4) to (7) need to be read with section 5(3), (3A)(b) and (3B)(b) (territorial scope of charge to corporation tax).
2
In this Part—
a
“non-trading credits” means credits for any accounting period in respect of a company's loan relationships that are not brought into account under section 297(2), and
b
“non-trading debits” means debits for any accounting period in respect of a company's loan relationships that are not brought into account under section 297(3).
3
But see also—
a
section 330 (debits in respect of pre-trading expenditure), and
b
section 482(1) (under which credits or debits to be brought into account under Chapter 2 of Part 6 (relevant non-lending relationships) are treated as non-trading credits or debits).
4
A company has non-trading profits for an accounting period from its loan relationships if the non-trading credits for the period exceed the non-trading debits for the period or there are no such debits.
5
The non-trading profits are equal to those credits, less any such debits.
6
A company has a non-trading deficit for an accounting period from its loan relationships if the non-trading debits for the period exceed the non-trading credits for the period or there are no such credits.
7
The non-trading deficit is equal to those debits, less any such credits.
Chapter 2

Basic definitions

“Loan relationship”, “creditor relationship”, “debtor relationship”
302
1
For the purposes of the Corporation Tax Acts a company has a loan relationship if—
a
the company stands in the position of a creditor or debtor as respects any money debt (whether by reference to a security or otherwise), and
b
the debt arises from a transaction for the lending of money.
2
References to a loan relationship and to a company being a party to a loan relationship are to be read accordingly.
3
For cases where this Part applies as if a relationship were a loan relationship despite the money debt not arising from a transaction for the lending of money see Chapter 2 of Part 6 (relevant non-lending relationships).
4
See also the following provisions of Part 6 (under which other matters are treated as loan relationships or rights, payments or profits under loan relationships)—
a
Chapter 3 (OEICs, unit trusts and offshore funds),
b
Chapter 4 (building societies),
c
Chapter 5 (registered societies),
d
Chapter 6 (alternative finance arrangements),
e
Chapter 7 (shares with guaranteed returns etc),
f
Chapter 8 (returns from partnerships),
g
Chapter 9 (manufactured interest etc),
h
Chapter 10 (repos), and
i
Chapter 11 (investment life insurance contracts).
5
In this Part “creditor relationship”, in relation to a company, means any loan relationship of the company where it stands in the position of a creditor as respects the debt in question.
6
In this Part “debtor relationship”, in relation to a company, means any loan relationship of the company where it stands in the position of a debtor as respects the debt in question.

“Money debt”
303
1
For the purposes of this Part a money debt is a debt which—
a
falls to be settled—
i
by the payment of money,
ii
by the transfer of a right to settlement under a debt which is itself a money debt, or
iii
by the issue or transfer of any share in any company,
b
has at any time fallen to be so settled, or
c
may at the option of the debtor or the creditor fall to be so settled.
2
For the purposes of subsection (1) any option exercisable by either party to settle the debt in any other way than is mentioned in subsection (1)(a) is ignored.
3
A money debt is a debt arising from a transaction for the lending of money for the purposes of this Part if an instrument is issued by any person for the purpose of representing—
a
security for the debt, or
b
the rights of a creditor in respect of the debt.
4
A debt does not arise from a transaction for the lending of money for the purposes of this Part so far as it arises from rights conferred by shares in a company.
5
But see the following provisions (as a result of which some such rights are within this Chapter)—
a
Chapter 3 of Part 6 (OEICs, unit trusts and offshore funds),
b
Chapter 7 of that Part (shares with guaranteed returns etc).
6
For the meaning of “share” see section 476(1).

“Related transaction”
304
1
In this Part “related transaction”, in relation to a loan relationship, means any disposal or acquisition (in whole or in part) of rights or liabilities under the relationship.
2
For this purpose the cases where there is taken to be such a disposal and acquisition include those where rights or liabilities under the loan relationship are transferred or extinguished by any sale, gift, exchange, surrender, redemption or release.

Payments, interest, rights and liabilities under a loan relationship
305
1
For the purposes of this Part references to payments or interest under a loan relationship are references to payments or interest paid or payable in pursuance of any of the rights or liabilities under that relationship.
2
For the purposes of this Part references to rights or liabilities under a loan relationship are references to any of the rights or liabilities under the arrangements as a result of which that relationship subsists.
3
For the purposes of this Part rights or liabilities under a loan relationship are taken to include the rights or liabilities attached to any security that is issued in relation to the money debt in question (and so is a security representing that relationship).
4
But for the treatment of funding bonds see—
a
section 413 (issue of funding bonds), and
b
section 414 (redemption of funding bonds).
Chapter 3

The credits and debits to be brought into account: general

Introduction

Overview of Chapter
306
1
This Chapter contains rules of general application about the credits and debits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part.
2
In particular, it—
za
makes provision about the matters in respect of which amounts are to be brought into account (see section 306A),
a
provides for the application of generally accepted accounting practice in determining the amounts to be brought into account as credits and debits and makes provision where accounts do not comply with that practice (see sections 307 to 312),
b
makes provision about bases of accounting (see sections 313 and 314),
c
provides for adjustments on changes of accounting basis (see sections 315 to 319),
d
sets out some general rules that differ from generally accepted accounting practice (see sections 320 to 327),
e
provides for exchange gains and losses to be included in the profits and losses of a company from loan relationships (see section 328),
f
makes provision about debits for pre-loan relationship, abortive or pre-trading expenses (see sections 329 and 330),
g
makes provision about cases where amounts are recognised even though companies are not, or have ceased to be, parties to loan relationships (see section 330A), and
h
provides for deemed assignments where a company's residence or operations move abroad (see sections 333 and 334).
3
For further rules about the credits and debits to be brought into account in particular situations and cases, see—
a
Chapter 4 (continuity of treatment on transfers within groups or on reorganisations),
b
Chapter 5 (connected companies relationships: introduction and general),
c
Chapter 6 (connected companies relationships: impairment losses and releases of debts),
d
Chapter 7 (group relief claims involving impaired or released consortium debts),
e
Chapter 8 (connected parties relationships: late interest),
f
Chapter 9 (partnerships involving companies),
g
Chapter 10 (insurance companies),
h
Chapter 11 (other special kinds of company),
i
Chapter 12 (special rules for particular kinds of securities),
j
Chapter 13 (European cross-border transfers of business),
k
Chapter 14 (European cross-border mergers), and
l
Chapter 15 (tax avoidance).

Matters in respect of which amounts are to be brought into account

Matters in respect of which amounts to be brought into account
306A
1
The matters in respect of which amounts are to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of a company's loan relationships are—
a
profits and losses of the company that arise to it from its loan relationships and related transactions (excluding interest or expenses),
b
interest under those relationships, and
c
expenses incurred by the company under or for the purposes of those relationships and transactions.
2
Expenses are only treated as incurred as mentioned in subsection (1)(c) if they are incurred directly—
a
in bringing any of the loan relationships into existence,
b
in entering into or giving effect to any of the related transactions,
c
in making payments under any of those relationships or as a result of any of those transactions, or
d
in taking steps to ensure the receipt of payments under any of those relationships or in accordance with any of those transactions.
3
For the treatment of pre-loan relationship and abortive expenses, see section 329.

General principles about the bringing into account of credits and debits

General principles about the bringing into account of credits and debits
307
1
This Part operates by reference to the accounts of companies and amounts recognised for accounting purposes.
2
The general rule is that the amounts to be brought into account by a company as credits and debits for any period for the purposes of this Part in respect of the matters mentioned in section 306A(1) are those that are recognised in determining the company's profit or loss for the period in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice.
2A
Subsections (2B) and (2C) apply if an accounting period of a company does not coincide with one or more of its periods of account.
2B
The amounts referred to in subsection (2) are to be determined by apportionment in accordance with section 1172 of CTA 2010 (time basis).
2C
But if it appears that apportionment in accordance with that section would work unreasonably or unjustly for an accounting period, subsection (2) is to be read as referring to amounts that would have been recognised in determining the company's profit or loss for that period in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice if accounts had been drawn up for that period.
3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
This section is subject to the following provisions of this Part.

Amounts recognised in determining a company's profit or loss

Amounts recognised in determining a company's profit or loss
308
1
References in this Part to an amount recognised in determining a company's profit or loss for a period are references to an amount that is recognised in the company's accounts for the period as an item of profit or loss.
1A
The reference in subsection (1) to an amount recognised in the company's accounts for the period as an item of profit or loss includes a reference to an amount that—
a
was previously recognised as an item of other comprehensive income, and
b
is transferred to become an item of profit or loss in determining the company's profit or loss for the period.
1B
In subsections (1) and (1A) “item of profit or loss” and “item of other comprehensive income” each has the meaning that it has for accounting purposes.
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Companies without GAAP-compliant accounts
309
1
If a company—
a
draws up accounts which are not GAAP-compliant accounts, or
b
does not draw up accounts at all,
this Part applies as if GAAP-compliant accounts had been drawn up.
2
Accordingly, references in this Part to amounts recognised for accounting purposes are references to the amounts that would have been recognised if GAAP-compliant accounts had been drawn up for the period of account in question and any relevant earlier period.
3
For this purpose a period of account is relevant to a later period if the accounts for the later period rely to any extent on amounts derived from the earlier period.
4
In this section “GAAP-compliant accounts” means accounts drawn up in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice.

Power to make regulations about recognised amounts
310
1
The Treasury may by regulations—
a
make provision excluding from section 308(1) ... amounts of a specified description, and
b
make provision for or in connection with bringing into account in specified circumstances amounts in relation to which section 308(1) ... does not have effect as a result of regulations under paragraph (a).
2
The regulations may provide that section 308(1) ... does not apply to specified amounts in a period of account so far as they derive from or otherwise relate to amounts brought into account in a specified way in a previous period of account.
3
The regulations may—
a
make different provision for different cases, and
b
make provision subject to an election or to other specified conditions.
4
The regulations may apply to periods of account beginning before they are made, but not earlier than the beginning of the calendar year in which they are made.
5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Amounts not fully recognised for accounting purposes: introduction
311
1
Section 312 applies for the purpose of determining the credits and debits which a company is to bring into account for a period for the purposes of this Part in the following case.
2
The case is where—
a
the company is, or is treated as, a party to a creditor relationship in the period, and
b
as a result of tax avoidance arrangements to which the company is at any time a party, an amount is (in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice) not fully recognised for the period in respect of the creditor relationship.
3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
For the purposes of this section and section 312 an amount is not fully recognised for a period in respect of a relationship of a company ... if—
a
no amount in respect of the relationship ... is recognised in determining its profit or loss for the period, or
b
an amount is so recognised in respect of only part of the relationship ....
7
For the purposes of this section arrangements are “tax avoidance arrangements” if the main purpose, or one of the main purposes, of any party to the arrangements, in entering into them, is to obtain a tax advantage.
8
In subsection (7) “
arrangements
” includes any arrangements, scheme or understanding of any kind, whether or not legally enforceable, involving a single transaction or two or more transactions.
9
For the purposes of this section a company is to be treated as a party to a creditor relationship even though it has disposed of its rights under the relationship to another person—
a
under a repo or stock lending arrangement, or
b
under a transaction which is treated as not involving any disposal as a result of section 26 of
TCGA
1992 (mortgages and charges not to be treated as disposals).

Determination of credits and debits where amounts not fully recognised
312
1
In determining the credits and debits which a company is to bring into account for the period referred to in section 311(1) for the purposes of this Part in respect of—
a
the creditor relationship mentioned in section 311(2), ...
b. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
the assumption in subsection (2) is to be made.
1A
Subsection (1B) applies in a case where—
a
pursuant to the arrangements mentioned in section 311(2)(b), the company becomes, or is treated as becoming, a party to a debtor relationship, and
b
an amount is (in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice) not fully recognised for any period in respect of the debtor relationship.
1B
In determining the debits and credits which a company is to bring into account for any period for the purposes of this Part in respect of the debtor relationship ..., the assumption in subsection (2) is to be made.
2
The assumption is that an amount in respect of the whole of the relationship in question is recognised in determining the company's profit or loss for the period.
3
But—
a
no debits are, as a result of this section, to be brought into account by the company in respect of the creditor relationship mentioned in section 311(2), and
b
the amount of any debits to be brought into account by the company for a period as a result of this section applying in respect of its debtor relationships must not exceed the amount of any credits to be brought into account by it for the period as a result of this section applying in respect of its creditor relationships.
4
Subsection (5) applies in any case where—
a
apart from this section any credits or debits are brought into account for a period for the purposes of this Part by the company in respect of a loan relationship, and
b
the relationship is a creditor relationship within subsection (1) or a debtor relationship within subsection (1B).
5
The credits and debits which are to be so brought into account as a result of this section are to be determined on the same basis of accounting as that on which the credits or debits mentioned in subsection (4)(a) are determined.
6
In any other case, the credits and debits which are to be so brought into account as a result of this section are to be determined on an amortised cost basis of accounting.

Accounting bases

Basis of accounting: “amortised cost basis”, “fair value accounting” and “fair value”
313
1
The general rule is that the amounts to be brought into account by a company as credits and debits for any period of account for the purposes of this Part may be determined on any basis of accounting that is in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice ... .
2
But subsection (1) is subject to ... the following provisions (which require a particular accounting basis to be used)—
a
section 312(5) and (6) (determination of credits and debits where amounts not fully recognised for accounting purposes),
b
section 349(2) (application of amortised cost basis to connected companies relationships),
c
section 382(2) (company partners using fair value accounting),
d
section 399(2) (index-linked gilt-edged securities: application of fair value accounting),
e. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
f. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
g
section 482(2) (application of amortised cost basis of accounting to discounts arising from a money debt under a relevant non-lending relationship), and
h
section 490(3) (holdings in OEICs, unit trusts and offshore funds: application of fair value accounting) ... .
i. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
In this Part “amortised cost basis of accounting”, in relation to a company's loan relationship, means a basis of accounting under which an asset or liability representing the loan relationship is measured in the company's balance sheet at its amortised cost using the effective interest method, but with that amortised cost being adjusted as necessary where the loan relationship is the hedged item under a designated fair value hedge.
4A
In subsection (4) each of the following expressions has the meaning that it has for accounting purposes—
- “
amortised cost
”, in relation to assets or liabilities;
- “
the effective interest method
”, in relation to the measurement of assets or liabilities.
5
In this Part “
fair value accounting
” means a basis of accounting under which—
a
assets and liabilities are measured in the company's balance sheet at their fair value, and
b
changes in the fair value of assets and liabilities are recognised as items of profit or loss.
6
For the meaning of “fair value”, see section 476(1).
7
In this Part each of the following has the meaning that it has for accounting purposes—
- “designated fair value hedge”;
- “hedged item”.

Power to make regulations about changes from amortised cost basis
314
1
This section applies if the credits or debits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of assets or liabilities of a company—
a
are required in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice to be dealt with for accounting purposes using fair value accounting, and
b
were previously dealt with for those purposes on an amortised cost basis.
2
The Treasury may by regulations provide that the credits or debits must continue to be determined on an amortised cost basis of accounting.
3
The regulations may—
a
make different provision for different cases,
b
make incidental, supplemental, consequential and transitional provision and savings, and
c
make provision subject to an election or to other specified conditions.

Adjustments on change of accounting basis

Introduction to sections 316 and 318
315
1
Sections 316 and 318 (adjustments on change of accounting basis) apply if—
a
a company changes, from one period of account or accounting period to the next, the basis of accounting on which credits and debits relating to its loan relationships or any of them are calculated for the purposes of this Part,
b
the change of basis—
i
is made in order to comply with a provision made by or under this Part requiring those credits and debits to be determined on a particular basis of accounting, or
ii
results from a change of the company's accounting policy,
c
the change of basis is not made in order to comply with amending legislation not applicable to the previous period,
d
the old basis accorded with the law or practice applicable in relation to the period before the change, and
e
the new basis accords with the law and practice applicable to the period after the change.
2
In this section and sections 316 and 318—
a
the first of the periods mentioned in subsection (1) is referred to as “the earlier period”, and
b
the next is referred to as “the later period”.
3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
For a case where this section and sections 316 to 318 apply as if a change of accounting policy had occurred, see section 416(5) (election for application of sections 415 and 585).

Change of basis of accounting involving change of value
316
1
If there is a difference between—
a
the tax-adjusted carrying value of an asset or liability at the end of the earlier period, and
b
the tax-adjusted carrying value of that asset or liability at the beginning of the later period,
a credit or debit (as the case may be) of an amount equal to the difference must be brought into account for the purposes of this Part for the later period in the same way as a credit or debit which is brought into account in determining the company's profit or loss for that period in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice.
2
This section does not apply so far as the credit or debit falls to be brought into account apart from this section.

Carrying value
317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Change of accounting basis following cessation of loan relationship
318
1
This section applies if—
a
the company has ceased to be a party to a loan relationship in an accounting period (“the cessation period”),
b
section 330A (company is not, or has ceased to be, party to loan relationship) applied to the cessation, and
c
there is a difference between the amount outstanding in respect of the loan relationship (see subsection (5))—
i
at the end of the earlier period, and
ii
at the beginning of the later period.
2
A credit or debit (as the case may be) of an amount equal to the difference must be brought into account for the purposes of this Part for the later period in the same way as a credit or debit which is brought into account in determining the company's profit or loss for that period in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice.
4
Subsection (2) does not apply so far as the credit or debit falls to be brought into account apart from this section.
5
In this section “
the amount outstanding in respect of the loan relationship
” means—
a
so much of the recognised deferred income or recognised deferred loss from the loan relationship as has not been represented by credits or debits brought into account under this Part in respect of the relationship, and
b
any amounts relating to the matters mentioned in section 306A(1) in respect of the loan relationship that have in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice been recognised in the company's accounts as items of other comprehensive income and not transferred to become items of profit or loss.
6
In subsection (5)—
- “recognised deferred income”, in relation to a loan relationship, means the amount recognised in the company's balance sheet in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice as deferred income in respect of the profits which arose from the relationship or a related transaction in the cessation period, and
- “recognised deferred loss”, in relation to a loan relationship, means the amount so recognised as deferred loss in respect of the losses which so arose.
7
In determining what amounts fall within subsection (5)(b) at the beginning or end of a period, it is to be assumed that the accounting policy applied in drawing up the company's accounts for the period was also applied in previous periods.
8
But if the company's accounts for the period are in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice drawn up on an assumption as to the accounting policy in previous periods which differs from that mentioned in subsection (7), that different assumption applies in determining what amounts fall within subsection (5)(b) at the beginning or end of the period.

General power to make regulations about changes in accounting policy
319
1
The Treasury may by regulations make provision for cases where there is a change of accounting policy in drawing up a company's accounts from one period of account to the next which affects the amounts to be brought into account for accounting purposes in respect of the company's loan relationships.
2
The regulations may provide for any credits or debits which would otherwise be brought into account for the purposes of this Part—
a
not to be brought into account,
b
to be brought into account only to a prescribed extent, or
c
to be brought into account over a prescribed period or in prescribed circumstances.
3
Regulations under this section may, in particular, modify the operation of sections 315 to 318.
4
The regulations may make—
a
different provision for different cases, and
b
incidental, supplemental, consequential and transitional provision and savings.
5
The regulations may apply to periods of account beginning before they are made, but not earlier than the beginning of the calendar year in which they are made.

Rules differing from generally accepted accounting practice

Credits and debits treated as relating to capital expenditure
320
1
This section applies if—
a
an amount for an accounting period in respect of a company's loan relationship relates to any of the matters in section 306A(1),
b
generally accepted accounting practice allows the amount to be treated in the company's accounts as an amount recognised in determining the carrying value of an asset or liability, and
c
any profit or loss for corporation tax purposes in relation to that asset or liability will not fall to be calculated in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice.
2
Despite that treatment, the amount is to be brought into account as a credit or debit for the purposes of this Part, for the accounting period for which it is recognised, in the same way as an amount which is brought into account as a credit or debit in determining the company's profit or loss for that period in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice.
3
But subsection (2) does not apply to an amount which relates to an intangible fixed asset to which an election under section 730 (writing down at fixed rate: election for fixed-rate basis) applies.
4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
If an amount relating to an asset or liability is brought into account as mentioned in subsection (2) as a debit, no debit may be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of—
a
the writing down of so much of the value of the asset or liability as is attributable to that debit, or
b
so much of any amortisation or depreciation representing a writing-off of that value as is attributable to that debit.

Amounts recognised in other comprehensive income and not transferred to profit or loss
320A
1
This section applies if—
a
in a period of account an asset or liability representing a loan relationship of a company ceases in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice to be recognised in the company's accounts,
b
amounts relating to the matters mentioned in section 306A(1) in respect of that loan relationship have in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice been recognised in the company's accounts as items of other comprehensive income and have not subsequently been transferred to become items of profit or loss, and
c
condition A or B is met.
2
Condition A is that, at the time when the asset or liability ceases to be recognised, it is not expected that the amounts mentioned in subsection (1)(b) will in future be transferred to become items of profit or loss.
3
Condition B is that, at any later time, it is no longer expected that the amounts mentioned in subsection (1)(b) will in future be transferred to become items of profit or loss.
4
The amounts mentioned in subsection (1)(b)—
a
must be brought into account for the purposes of this Part as credits or debits for the period of account in which the time mentioned in subsection (2) or (3) falls, in the same way as a credit or debit which is brought into account in determining the company's profit or loss for that period in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice, and
b
must not be brought into account for a later period of account even if they are subsequently transferred to become items of profit or loss for the later period.
5
This section applies in a case where part of an asset or liability representing a loan relationship of a company ceases to be recognised in the company's accounts as it applies in a case where the whole of an asset or liability representing a loan relationship ceases to be recognised, but as if the reference in subsection (1)(b) to amounts in respect of the loan relationship were a reference to so much of those amounts as are attributable to that part of the asset or liability.
6
In determining what amounts fall within subsection (1)(b) at any time in an accounting period, it is to be assumed that the accounting policy applied in drawing up the company's accounts for the period was also applied in previous accounting periods.
7
But if the company's accounts for the period are in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice drawn up on an assumption as to the accounting policy in previous accounting periods which differs from that mentioned in subsection (6), that different assumption applies in determining what amounts fall within subsection (1)(b) at the time in question.
8
In this section “item of profit or loss” and “item of other comprehensive income” each has the meaning that it has for accounting purposes.

Hybrid capital instruments: amounts recognised in equity
320B
1
This section applies if in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice, an amount in respect of a hybrid capital instrument relating to any of the matters in section 306A(1) of CTA 2009—
a
is recognised in equity or shareholders' funds for a period, and
b
is not recognised in the company's accounts for the period as an item of profit or loss or as an item of other comprehensive income.
2
The amount is to be brought into account for the period for the purposes of this Part in the same way as an amount which is brought into account as a credit or debit in determining the company's profit or loss for the period in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice.
3
But this section does not bring into account for the purposes of this Part any exchange gain or loss of the company which is recognised in the company's statement of total recognised gains and losses, statement of recognised income and expense, statement of changes in equity or statement of income and retained earnings.

Credits and debits recognised in equity
321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Restriction on debits resulting from release of loans to participators etc
321A
1
This section applies if—
a
a loan gives rise to a charge to tax under section 455 of CTA 2010 (including a charge by virtue of section 459 or 460 of that Act), and
b
the whole or a part of the debt in respect of the loan is released or written off.
2
No debit is to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of the release or writing off.

Release of debts: cases where credits not required to be brought into account
322
1
This section applies if—
a
a liability to pay an amount under a company's debtor relationship is released, and
b
the release takes place in an accounting period for which an amortised cost basis of accounting is used in respect of that relationship.
2
The company is not required to bring into account a credit in respect of the release for the purposes of this Part if any of conditions A to E is met.
3
Condition A is that the release is part of a statutory insolvency arrangement.
4
Condition B is that the release is not a release of relevant rights and is—
a
in consideration of shares forming part of the ordinary share capital of the debtor company, or
b
in consideration of any entitlement to such shares.
4A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
Condition C is that—
a
the debtor company meets one of the insolvency conditions (see subsection (6)), and
b
the debtor relationship is not a connected companies relationship (see section 348).
5A
Condition D is that the liability is released in consequence of
the making of a mandatory reduction instrument or a third country instrument or
the exercise of a stabilisation power under Part 1 of the Banking Act 2009
or the exercise of a third-country instrument or a stabilisation power under Schedule 11 to the Financial Services and Markets Act 2023
.
5B
Condition E is that—
a
the release is neither a deemed release, as defined by section 358(3), nor a release of relevant rights, and
b
immediately before the release, it is reasonable to assume that, without the release and any arrangements of which the release forms part, there would be a material risk that at some time within the next 12 months the company would be unable to pay its debts.
6
For the purposes of this section a company meets the insolvency conditions if—
a
it is in insolvent liquidation,
b
it is in insolvent administration,
c
it is in insolvent administrative receivership,
d
an appointment of a provisional liquidator is in force in relation to the company under section 135 of the Insolvency Act 1986 (c. 45) or Article 115 of the Insolvency (Northern Ireland) Order 1989 (S.I. 1989/2405 (N.I. 19)), or
e
under the law of a country or territory outside the United Kingdom circumstances corresponding to those mentioned in paragraph (a), (b), (c) or (d) exist.
6A
In subsections (4) and (5B)(a), “
relevant rights
” has the same meaning as in section 358.
7
Section 323(A1) applies for the interpretation of subsection (5B)(b); and the rest of section 323 applies for the interpretation of subsection (6).
8
For further cases where no credit in respect of the release is to be brought into account, see—
a
section 358 (exclusion of credits on release of connected companies debts: general), and
b
section 359 (exclusion of credits on release of connected companies debts during creditor's insolvency).

Meaning of expressions relating to insolvency etc
323
A1
For the purposes of sections 322(5B) and 323A(1)(b) a company is unable to pay its debts if—
a
it is unable to pay its debts as they fall due, or
b
the value of the company's assets is less than the amount of its liabilities, taking into account its contingent and prospective liabilities.
1
For the purposes of section 322(6) a company is in insolvent liquidation during the period—
a
beginning when it goes into liquidation at a time when its assets are insufficient for the payment of its debts and other liabilities and the expenses of the winding up, and
b
ending when the winding up is completed or otherwise brought to an end (whether under paragraph 37 or 38 of Schedule B1 to the Insolvency Act 1986 (c. 45) or otherwise).
2
In subsection (1) “liquidation” has the meaning given in—
a
section 247(2) of the Insolvency Act 1986, or
b
Article 6(2) of the Insolvency (Northern Ireland) Order 1989 (S.I. 1989/2405 (N.I. 19)).
3
For the purposes of section 322(6) a company in administration is in insolvent administration if it entered administration under—
a
Schedule B1 to the Insolvency Act 1986, or
b
Schedule B1 to the Insolvency (Northern Ireland) Order 1989 (S.I. 1989/2405 (N.I. 19)),
at a time when its assets were insufficient for the payment of its debts and other liabilities and the expenses of the administration.
4
For the purposes of section 322(6) a company is in insolvent administrative receivership if—
a
an appointment of an administrative receiver is in force in relation to the company, and
b
the company was put into administrative receivership at a time when its assets were insufficient for the payment of its debts and other liabilities and the expenses of administrative receivership.
5
In subsection (4) “administrative receiver” has the same meaning as in—
a
Chapter 1 or 2 of Part 3 of the Insolvency Act 1986 (c. 45), or
b
Part 4 of the Insolvency (Northern Ireland) Order 1989 (S.I. 1989/2405 (N.I. 19)),
and “administrative receivership” is to be read accordingly.

Substantial modification: cases where credits not required to be brought into account
323A
1
Subsection (2) applies if—
a
a debtor relationship of a company is modified or replaced by another,
b
immediately before the modification or replacement it is reasonable to assume that, without the modification or replacement and any arrangements of which the modification or replacement forms part, there would be a material risk that at some time within the next 12 months the company would be unable to pay its debts, and
c
the modification or replacement is treated for accounting purposes as a substantial modification of the terms of a loan relationship of the company.
2
The company is not required to bring into account for the purposes of this Part a credit in respect of any change in the carrying value of the liability representing the modified or replacement debtor relationship.
3
If as a result of subsection (2) no credit was brought into account in respect of a change in the carrying value of a liability representing a debtor relationship, the company may not bring into account a debit for the purposes of this Part in respect of a change in the carrying value of that liability, to the extent that the change represents a reversal of the change in carrying value to which subsection (2) applied.
4
Section 323(A1) applies for the interpretation of subsection (1)(b).

Insurers in financial difficulties: write-down orders
323B
1
Subsection
(2)
applies if a debtor relationship of a company is modified by a write-down order.
2
The company is not required to bring into account for the purposes of this Part a credit in respect of any change in the carrying value of the liability representing the modified debtor relationship.
3
If as a result of subsection
(2)
no credit was brought into account in respect of a change in the carrying value of a liability representing a debtor relationship, the company may not bring into account a debit for the purposes of this Part in respect of a change in the carrying value of that liability, to the extent that the change represents a reversal of the change in carrying value to which subsection
(2)
applied.
4
In this section “
write-down order
” means an order under section 377A of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (court order writing down liabilities of insurer).

Restriction on debits resulting from revaluation
324
1
No debit is to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part as a result of the revaluation of an asset representing a creditor relationship of a company except—
a
an impairment loss, or
b
a debit resulting from a release by the company of any liability under the relationship.
2
For the meaning of “impairment loss” see section 476(1).
3
The reference in subsection (1) to revaluation of an asset includes any case where a provision or allowance is made by the company reducing the carrying value of the asset or of a group of assets including the asset in question.
3A
Where a company has a hedging relationship between a relevant contract (“the hedging instrument”) and the asset or liability representing the loan relationship, this section does not prevent credits or debits being brought into account in respect of changes in the fair value of the asset or liability which are attributable to any of the risks in respect of which the hedging instrument was intended to act as a hedge.
4
This section does not affect the debits to be brought into account in respect of exchange gains or losses.
5
This section does not apply if fair value accounting is used.

Restriction on credits resulting from reversal of disallowed debits
325
1
No credit is to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of the reversal of a debit disallowed by section 324(1).
2
This section does not apply if fair value accounting is used.
3
See also paragraph 61 of Schedule 2 (restriction on bringing into account credits resulting from reversal of debits disallowed in a period of account beginning before 1 January 2005).

Writing off government investments
326
1
This section applies if a government investment in a company is written off by the release of a liability to pay any amount under a debtor relationship of the company.
2
The company is not required to bring into account a credit for the purposes of this Part in respect of the release.
3
Section 94 of CTA 2010 (write-off of government investment) applies for interpreting the reference in subsection (1) to a government investment in a company being written off as it applies for the purposes of Chapter 7 of Part 4 of that Act.

Disallowance of imported losses etc
327
1
This section applies for an accounting period of a company (“the loss period”) if—
a
apart from this section, a loss arising in connection with a loan relationship of the company would fall to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part, and
b
the loss is wholly or partly referable to a time when the relationship was not subject to United Kingdom taxation.
2
The amounts brought into account for the loss period for the purposes of this Part must be such as to secure that none of the loss referable to a time when the relationship was not so subject is treated for those purposes as arising in the loss period or any other accounting period of the company.
3
For the purposes of this section a loss is referable to a time when a relationship is not subject to United Kingdom taxation so far as, at the time to which the loss is referable, the company would not have been chargeable to corporation tax in the United Kingdom on any profits arising from the relationship.
4
If the company was not a party to the relationship at the time to which the loss is referable, subsection (3) applies as if the reference to the company were a reference to the person who at that time was in the same position as respects the relationship as is subsequently held by the company.
5
An amount which would be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of any matter apart from this section is treated for the purposes of section 464(1) (amounts brought into account under this Part excluded from being otherwise brought into account) as if it were so brought into account.
6
Accordingly, that amount must not be brought into account for corporation tax purposes as respects that matter either under this Part or otherwise.
7
This section does not apply if fair value accounting is used.

Exchange gains and losses

Exchange gains and losses
328
1
The reference in section 306A(1) to the profits and losses arising to a company from its loan relationships and related transactions includes a reference to exchange gains and losses so arising.
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
But subsection (1) does not apply to an exchange gain or loss of a company so far as it—
a
arises as a result of the translation of the assets, liabilities, income and expenses of all or part of the company's business from the functional currency of the business, or that part of the business, into another currency, and
b
has been recognised as an item of other comprehensive income.
3A
In subsection (3)—
a
the reference to the functional currency of a business or part of a business is a reference to the currency of the primary economic environment in which the business or part operates, and
b
“assets, liabilities, income and expenses” and “item of other comprehensive income” each has the meaning that it has for accounting purposes.
3B
No amount is to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of an exchange gain or loss of an investment company (within the meaning of section 17 of CTA 2010) which would not have arisen but for a change in the company's functional currency (within the meaning of section 17(4) of that Act) as between—
a
the period of account of the company in which the gain or loss arises, and
b
a period of account of the company ending in the 12 months immediately preceding that period.
3C
But subsection (3B) does not apply to an exchange gain or loss arising at a time when an election under section 9A of CTA 2010 (designated currency of
UK
resident investment company) has effect in relation to the company.
4
The Treasury may by regulations make provision—
a
excluding exchange gains or losses of a specified description from being brought into account for the purposes of this Part,
b
requiring exchange gains or losses of a specified description which would not otherwise be brought into account for the purposes of this Part to be brought into account in specified circumstances,
c
as to the way in which, including the currency by reference to which, any exchange gains or losses to be brought into account as a result of provision made under paragraph (b) are to be calculated, and
d
as to the way in which any such exchange gains or losses are to be brought into account.
4ZA
For the purposes of subsection (4)(b), it does not matter whether the exchange gains or losses would otherwise be excluded from being brought into account as a result of regulations under subsection (4)(a) or otherwise.
4A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
The reference in subsection (4) to bringing exchange gains or losses into account is a reference to bringing them into account—
a
for the purposes of this Part as credits or debits arising to a company from its loan relationships, or
b
for the purposes of corporation tax on chargeable gains.
7
The regulations may—
a
make different provision for different cases, and
b
make provision subject to an election or to other specified conditions.
8
For the meaning of references to exchange gains or losses from loan relationships, see section 475.

Arrangements that have a “one-way exchange effect”
328A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Meaning of “relevant exchange gain” and “relevant exchange loss”
328B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Meaning of “test day”
328C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Counterfactual currency movement assumptions
328D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Counterfactual currency movement assumptions: treatment of options
328E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Meaning of “option”
328F. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Meaning of “relevant contingent contract” and “operative condition”
328G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Other interpretative provisions
328H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pre-loan relationship, abortive and pre-trading expenses

Pre-loan relationship and abortive expenses
329
1
This section applies if—
a
a company may enter into a loan relationship or related transaction but has not yet done so,
b
it incurs any expenses for purposes connected—
i
with entering into it, or
ii
with giving effect to any obligation which might arise under it, and
c
had the company entered into the relationship or transaction, the expenses would be expenses within section 306A(1)(c).
2
The expenses are treated as expenses in relation to which debits may be brought into account in accordance with section 307(2) to the same extent as if the company had entered into the relationship or transaction.

Debits in respect of pre-trading expenditure
330
1
This section applies if—
a
a non-trading debit is given for an accounting period of a company for the purposes of this Part, and
b
within the period of 2 years beginning with the end of the period the company makes an election for the purposes of this section in respect of the debit.
2
The debit must not be brought into account for the purposes of this Part as a non-trading debit for that period.
3
Instead, if conditions A and B are met in respect of a trade, the debit—
a
is treated for the purposes of this Part as if it were a debit for the accounting period in which the company begins to carry on the trade, and
b
is to be brought into account in accordance with section 297(3) (trading debits).
4
Condition A is that the company begins to carry on the trade within the period of 7 years after the end of the accounting period for which a non-trading debit is given for the purposes of this Part.
5
Condition B is that that debit is such that, if it were given for the accounting period in which the company begins to carry on the trade, it would be brought into account by reference to that trade in accordance with section 297(3).

Pre-commencement debits of property businesses etc of non-UK resident companies

Debits referable to times before UK property business etc carried on
330ZA
1
This section applies if—
a
a non-UK resident company has debits in respect of a loan relationship to which it is a party for the purposes of its UK property business,
b
the debits are referable to times (“the pre-rental times”) before (but not more than 7 years before) the date on which it starts to carry on the business, and
c
the debits are not otherwise brought into account for tax purposes.
2
If, on the assumption that the company had been carrying on the business at the pre-rental times, the debits—
a
would have been recognised in determining its profit or loss for a period consisting of or including those times, and
b
would have been brought into account for the purposes of this Part,
the debits are (so far as they exceed relevant credits) treated for the purposes of this Part as if they were debits for the accounting period in which it started to carry on the business.
3
For this purpose “
relevant credits
” means credits of the company in respect of the loan relationship which, on the assumption that the company had been carrying on the business at the pre-rental times—
a
would have been recognised in determining its profit or loss for a period consisting of or including those times,
b
would have been brought into account for the purposes of this Part, and
c
would not otherwise have been brought into account for tax purposes.
4
This section is subject to section 327 (disallowance of imported losses etc).
5
This section also applies in relation to a non-UK resident company which is a party to a loan relationship for the purpose of enabling it to generate other UK property income (within the meaning given by section 5(6)).

Company is not, or has ceased to be, party to loan relationship

Company is not, or has ceased to be, party to loan relationship
330A
1
This section applies if—
a
amounts in respect of a qualifying relationship are recognised in a company's accounts for an accounting period (“
the current period
”) as an item of profit or loss even though during all or part of the period the company is not a party to the qualifying relationship,
b
any of conditions A to D is met, and
c
in the absence of this section, the credits and debits brought into account by the company for the purposes of this Part or Part 7 for the current period would not include credits or debits representing the whole of those amounts.
2
In this section “
qualifying relationship
” means—
a
a loan relationship, or
b
a relationship that would be a loan relationship if references in section 302(1) to a company were references to any person.
References in this section to a company being a party to a qualifying relationship are to be read accordingly.
3
Condition A is that—
a
the company was a party to the qualifying relationship,
b
amounts in respect of the qualifying relationship were recognised in the company's accounts as an item of profit or loss when it was a party to the relationship, and
c
any amounts in respect of the relationship continue to be recognised in those accounts as an item of profit or loss.
4
Condition B is that the amounts recognised as mentioned in subsection (1)(a) are recognised as a result of a transaction which has the effect of transferring to the company all or part of the risk or reward relating to the qualifying relationship without a corresponding transfer of rights or obligations under the relationship.
5
Condition C is that the amounts recognised as mentioned in subsection (1)(a) are recognised as a result of a related transaction in relation to a qualifying relationship to which the company was, but has ceased to be, a party.
6
Condition D is that—
a
the amounts recognised as mentioned in subsection (1)(a) are recognised because the company may enter into a qualifying relationship or related transaction but has not yet done so, and
b
the amounts are not expenses to which section 329 applies.
7
The company must bring credits and debits into account for the purposes of this Part for the accounting period as if the company were a party to the qualifying relationship for the whole of the accounting period.
8
The amounts that must be brought into account are those amounts in respect of the qualifying relationship that are recognised in the company's accounts for the accounting period as an item of profit or loss (but subject to the provisions of this Part).
9
This section is subject to sections 330B and 330C.
10
In this section—
- “
item of profit or loss
” has the meaning it has for accounting purposes;
- “
recognised
” means recognised in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice;
- “
related transaction
”, in relation to a qualifying relationship, is to be read as if the references in section 304(1) and (2) to a loan relationship were to a qualifying relationship.

Exclusion of debit where relief allowed to another
330B
A company is not to bring into account as a debit for the purposes of this Part as a result of section 330A an amount which—
a
is brought into account as a debit for those purposes by another company,
b
is brought into account so as to reduce the assumed taxable total profits of another company for the purposes of Part 9A of TIOPA 2010 (controlled foreign companies), or
c
is allowable as a deduction by a person for the purposes of income tax.

Avoidance of double charge
330C
1
This section applies if at any time a company (“
the relevant company
”) is required by section 330A to bring into account as a credit for the purposes of this Part an amount—
a
which is brought into account as a credit for those purposes by another company,
b
which is brought into account in determining the assumed taxable total profits of another company for the purposes of Part 9A of TIOPA 2010 (controlled foreign companies), or
c
on which a person is charged to income tax.
2
In order to avoid a double charge to tax in respect of the amount, the relevant company may make a claim for one or more consequential adjustments to be made in respect of the amount to be brought into account as a credit.
3
On a claim under this section an officer of Revenue and Customs must make such of the consequential adjustments claimed (if any) as are just and reasonable.
4
Consequential adjustments may be made—
a
in respect of any period,
b
by way of an assessment, the modification of an assessment, the amendment of a claim, or otherwise, and
c
despite any time limit imposed by or under any enactment.

Company ceasing to be party to loan relationship

Company ceasing to be party to loan relationship
331. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Repo, stock lending and other transactions
332. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Company moving abroad

Company ceasing to be UK resident
333
1
If a company ceases to be UK resident, this Part applies as if—
a
immediately before so ceasing the company had assigned the assets and liabilities which represent its loan relationships for consideration of an amount equal to their fair value at that time, and
b
it had immediately reacquired them for consideration of the same amount.
2
Subsection (1) does not apply in relation to an asset or liability so far as immediately after the company ceases to be UK resident the asset is held or the liability is owed—
a
for the purposes of a permanent establishment of the company in the United Kingdom,
b
for the purposes of the company's trade of dealing in or developing UK land,
c
for the purposes of the company's UK property business, or
d
for the purposes of enabling the company to generate other UK property income (within the meaning given by section 5(6)).
3
Subsection (1) does not apply if—
a
the conditions in section 344(1)(a) to (c) are met in relation to the company (transferee leaving group after replacing transferor as party to loan relationship), and
b
it ceases to be UK resident at the same time as it ceases to be a member of the relevant group.
4
In subsection (3) “the relevant group” has the meaning given in section 344(4).

Non-UK resident company ceasing to hold loan relationship for section 333(2) purposes
334
1
This section applies if an asset or liability representing a loan relationship of a company which is not UK resident ceases to be held or owed for section 333(2) purposes in circumstances not involving a related transaction (but see subsection (3)).
2
This Part applies as if—
a
immediately before the asset or liability so ceases the company had assigned it, so far as so ceasing, for consideration of an amount equal to its fair value at that time, and
b
the company had immediately reacquired it for consideration of the same amount.
3
This section does not apply if—
a
the conditions in section 344(1)(a) to (c) are met in relation to the company (transferee leaving group after replacing transferor as party to loan relationship), and
b
the asset or liability mentioned in subsection (1) ceases to be held or owed for section 333(2) purposes at the same time as the company ceases to be a member of the relevant group.
4
In subsection (3) “the relevant group” has the meaning given in section 344(4).
5
An asset or liability ceases to be held or owed for section 333(2) purposes if and in so far as—
a
it ceases to be held or owed for any purposes mentioned in section 333(2), and
b
on doing so, it does not begin or continue to be held or owed for any of the other purposes so mentioned.
Chapter 4

Continuity of treatment on transfers within groups or on reorganisations

Application of this Chapter

Introduction to Chapter
335
1
This Chapter applies in the cases mentioned in—
a
section 336 (transfers of loans on group transactions),
b
section 337 (transfers of loans on insurance business transfers), and
c
section 339 (issues of new securities on certain cross-border reorganisations).
2
The following sections make provision about how the credits and debits to be brought into account under this Part in those cases are determined—
a
sections 340 and 341 (which apply in the cases mentioned in sections 336 and 337), and
b
sections 342 and 343 (which apply in the case mentioned in section 339).
3
Sections 344 to 346 provide for the treatment of a loan relationship in respect of which section 336 has applied where the company replacing another as a party to a loan relationship later leaves the group of companies of which they were members.
4
Section 347 (disapplication of Chapter where transferor party to avoidance involving subsequent transfer by transferee) disapplies this Chapter in some circumstances in the cases mentioned in 336 and 337.
5
For the meaning of references in this Chapter to a company replacing another as a party to a loan relationship, see section 338.
6
In this Chapter references to a company being a member of a group of companies are to be read in accordance with section 170 of TCGA 1992 (interpretation of sections 171 to 181 of that Act: groups).

Transfers of loans on group transactions
336
1
The case referred to in section 335(1)(a) is where—
a
there is a transaction within subsection (2) or a series of transactions within subsection (3), and
b
as a result one of the companies involved (“the transferee”) directly or indirectly replaces the other (“the transferor”) as a party to a loan relationship.
2
A transaction is within this subsection if it is a related transaction between two companies which are—
a
members of the same group, and
b
within the charge to corporation tax in respect of that transaction.
3
A series of transactions is within this subsection if it is a series having the same effect as a related transaction between two companies each of which—
a
has been a member of the same group at any time in the course of that series, and
b
would be within the charge to corporation tax in respect of such a related transaction.
4
This Chapter does not apply as a result of this section in relation to—
a
a transfer of an asset, or
b
a transfer of rights under, or an interest in, an asset,
as a result of a transaction within subsection (2) or a series of transactions within subsection (3) if immediately before or after the transfer the asset is held for the purposes of a company's long-term business.
4A
For the purposes of subsection (4)—
a
in the case of an overseas life insurance company, ignore transfers in relation to assets which are not
UK
assets (within the meaning of section 117 of FA 2012), and
b
section 122 of that Act applies as it applies for the purposes of Chapter 8 of Part 2 of that Act.
5
In this Chapter, in relation to a case within subsection (1), “the transferee” and “the transferor” have the same meaning as in that subsection.

Transfers of loans on insurance business transfers
337
1
The case referred to in section 335(1)(b) is where—
a
a transfer between two companies occurs to which this section applies, and
b
as a result one of the companies (“the transferee”) directly or indirectly replaces the other (“the transferor”) as a party to a loan relationship.
2
This section applies to the transfers specified in subsection (3), so far as they are not excluded by subsection (4).
3
They are—
a
a transfer between two companies of business consisting of the effecting or carrying out of contracts of long-term insurance which has effect under an insurance business transfer scheme, and
b
any transfer between two companies which is a qualifying overseas transfer.
3A
In subsection (3)(b) “
qualifying overseas transfer
” means so much of a transfer of the whole or any part of the business of an overseas life insurance company carried on through a permanent establishment in the United Kingdom as takes place in accordance with an authorisation granted outside the United Kingdom for the purposes of
Article 39 of Directive 2009/138/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 25 November 2009 on the taking-up and pursuit of the business of Insurance and Reinsurance (Solvency II)
.
4
Subsection (3) does not apply to a transfer of an asset, or of rights under or an interest in an asset, if the asset—
a
was within one of the applicable categories immediately before the transfer, and
b
is not within that category immediately after it.
4A
For the purposes of subsection (4)(a) “
the applicable categories
” means—
a
in the case of a
UK
life insurance company, the long-term business categories or a category of assets which are not held for the purposes of its long-term business, and
b
in the case of an overseas life insurance company, the
UK
long-term business categories, a category of
UK
assets which are not held for the purposes of its long-term business or a category of assets which are held by it but which are not
UK
assets.
4B
For the purposes of subsection (4A)—
a
“
the long-term business categories
” has the same meaning as in section 116 of FA 2012,
b
“
the
UK
long-term business categories
” and “
UK
assets
” have the same meanings as in section 117 of that Act, and
c
section 122 of that Act applies as it applies for the purposes of Chapter 8 of Part 2 of that Act.
5
Subsection (6) applies for the purposes of subsection (4) if one of the companies mentioned in subsection (3) is an overseas life insurance company.
6
An asset is taken as being in the same category both immediately before and immediately after a transfer if the asset—
a
was in one category immediately before the transfer, and
b
is within the corresponding category immediately after it.
7
In this Chapter, in relation to a case within subsection (1), “the transferee” and “the transferor” have the same meaning as in that subsection.

Meaning of company replacing another as party to loan relationship
338
1
References in this Chapter to one company (“A”) replacing another company (“B”) as a party to a loan relationship include references to A becoming a party to a loan relationship which—
a
confers rights within subsection (2),
b
imposes obligations within subsection (2), or
c
both confers such rights and imposes such obligations.
2
Rights or obligations are within this subsection if they are equivalent to those of B under a loan relationship to which B has previously ceased to be a party.
3
For the purposes of subsection (2), A's rights under a creditor relationship are equivalent to rights under another creditor relationship if each set of rights gives the holder of an asset representing the relationship in question—
a
the same rights against the same persons as to capital, interest and dividends, and
b
the same remedies to enforce those rights.
4
For the purposes of subsection (3), any difference in—
a
the total nominal amounts of the assets representing each relationship,
b
the form in which they are held, or
c
the way in which they can be transferred,
is ignored.
5
For the purposes of subsection (2), A's obligations under a debtor relationship are equivalent to obligations under another debtor relationship if each set of obligations subjects the holder of the liability representing the relationship in question to—
a
the same obligations to the same persons as to capital, interest and dividends, and
b
the same remedies to enforce those obligations.
6
For the purposes of subsection (5), any difference in—
a
the total nominal amounts of the assets representing the creditor relationship corresponding to each relationship,
b
the form in which those assets are held, or
c
the way in which they can be transferred,
is ignored.

Issues of new securities on certain cross-border reorganisations
339
1
The case referred to in section 335(1)(c) is where each of conditions A to D is met.
2
Condition A is that sections 127 to 130 of TCGA 1992 (reorganisations: equation of original shares and new holding)—
a
apply in relation to an exchange as a result of section 135(3) of that Act (which provides for sections 127 to 130 to apply to an exchange of securities for those in another company as if it were a reorganisation), or
b
would so apply but for section 116(5) of that Act (which disapplies sections 127 to 130 where the original shares or the new holding consist of or include a qualifying corporate bond).
3
Condition B is that the original shares consist of or include an asset representing a loan relationship.
4
Condition C is that company A is resident in one member State and company B is resident in another member State.
5
For the purposes of this section a company is resident in a member State if—
a
it is within a charge to tax under the law of the State as being resident for that purpose, and
b
it is not regarded, for the purpose of any double taxation relief arrangements to which the State is a party, as resident in a territory not within a member State.
6
Condition D is that neither Chapter 13 (European cross-border transfers of business) nor Chapter 14 (European cross-border mergers) applies in relation to the exchange.
7
In this section—
a
“company A” and “company B” have the same meaning as in section 135 of TCGA 1992,
b
“original shares” has the same meaning as it has for the purposes of sections 126 to 131 of that Act, as applied by section 135 of that Act, and
c
“receiving company” means the company to which the issue of shares in or debentures of company B mentioned in section 135(1) of that Act is made.
8
If company B is a company to which section 135(5) of TCGA 1992 applies (companies with no share capital), the reference in subsection (7)(c) to the shares in or debentures of company B includes a reference to any interests in the company possessed by its members.

Continuity of treatment: transfer of loan at notional carrying value

Group transfers and transfers of insurance business: transfer at notional carrying value
340
1
This section applies in the cases mentioned in—
a
section 336 (transfers of loans on group transactions), and
b
section 337 (transfers of loans on insurance business transfers).
2
The credits and debits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of the loan relationship referred to in section 336(1)(b) or section 337(1)(b) are determined in accordance with subsections (3) to (5).
3
For the accounting period in which the transaction or, as the case may be, the first of the series of transactions takes place, the transferor is treated as having entered into that transaction for consideration of an amount equal to the notional carrying value of the asset or liability representing the relationship (see subsection (6)).
4
For any accounting period in which the transferee is a party to the relationship, it is treated as if it had acquired the asset or liability representing the relationship for consideration of an amount equal to its notional carrying value.
5
If a discount arises in respect of the transaction or series of transactions, the consideration is increased for the purposes of subsection (3) (but not subsection (4)) by the amount of the discount.
6
For the purposes of this section—
a. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
b
section 480(5) (when discount arises) applies as it applies for the purposes of section 480, and
c
“notional carrying value”, in relation to an asset or liability, means the amount which would have been its tax-adjusted carrying value based on the accounts of the transferor if a period of account had ended immediately before the date when the transferor ceased to be a party to the loan relationship.
7
Part 4 of TIOPA 2010 (provision not at arm's length) does not apply in relation to the amounts in respect of which credits or debits are to be brought into account under this section.
8
This section is subject to sections 332 and 341.

Transferor using fair value accounting
341
1
This section applies instead of section 340 if, in a case where that section would otherwise apply, the transferor is regarded for the purposes of this section as using fair value accounting in respect of the loan relationship (see subsection (5)).
2
The amount which is to be brought into account by the transferor in respect of the transaction or the series of transactions referred to in section 340(3) (“the transferor's amount”) is—
a
if an asset is to be brought into account, its fair value as at the date when the transferee becomes party to the loan relationship, or the fair value of the rights under or interest in it as at that date, and
b
if a liability is to be brought into account, its fair value as at that date.
3
For any accounting period in which the transferee is a party to the loan relationship, for the purpose of determining the credits and debits to be brought into account in respect of the relationship for the purposes of this Part, the transferee is treated as if it had acquired the asset or liability representing the relationship for consideration of an amount equal to the transferor's amount.
4
If a discount arises in respect of the transaction or series of transactions, the transferor's amount is increased for the purposes of subsection (2) (but not subsection (3)) by the amount of the discount.
5
The transferor is regarded for the purposes of this section as using fair value accounting in respect of the loan relationship only if the credits and debits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part as respects the relationship are determined on that basis.
6
It does not matter for the purposes of subsection (5) if the transferor does not otherwise use fair value accounting in respect of the loan relationship.
7
For the purposes of this section, section 480(5) (when discount arises) applies as it applies for the purposes of section 480.
8
This section is subject to section 332.

Issues of new securities on reorganisations: disposal at notional carrying value
342
1
This section applies in the case mentioned in section 339.
2
For the purposes of this Part such debits and credits are to be brought into account as would be brought into account if the exchange were a disposal of the asset representing the loan relationship referred to in section 339(3) for consideration of an amount equal to its notional carrying value.
3
For the purposes of this section, the notional carrying value of that asset is the amount that would have been its tax-adjusted carrying value based on the accounts of the receiving company if a period of account had ended immediately before the date when the exchange occurred.
4
In this section—
...
- “receiving company” has the meaning given in section 339(7).
5
This section is subject to section 343.

Receiving company using fair value accounting
343
1
This section applies instead of section 342 if, in a case where that section would otherwise apply, the receiving company is regarded for the purposes of this section as using fair value accounting in respect of the loan relationship constituting or included in the original shares.
2
The amount which is to be brought into account by the receiving company in respect of the exchange (“the disposal amount”) is the fair value of the asset representing the loan relationship as at the date when the exchange occurred, or of the rights under or interest in that relationship as at that date.
3
For any accounting period in which company B is a party to the loan relationship, for the purpose of determining the credits and debits to be brought into account in respect of the relationship for the purposes of this Part, company B is treated as if it had acquired the asset representing the relationship for consideration of an amount equal to the disposal amount.
4
Subsections (5) and (6) of section 341 apply for the purposes of this section as they apply for the purpose of that section, taking references in that section to the transferor as references to the receiving company.
5
In this section “company B”, “original shares” and “receiving company” have the meaning given in section 339(7).

Transferee leaving group after replacing transferor as party to loan relationship

Introduction
344
1
Sections 345 and 346 apply if—
a
this Chapter applies in the case mentioned in section 336 (transfers of loans on group transactions),
b
section 341 (transferor using fair value accounting) does not apply, and
c
before the end of the relevant 6 year period and while still a party to the relevant loan relationship, the transferee ceases to be a member of the relevant group.
2
But the transferee is not treated for the purposes of this section and sections 345 and 346 as having left the relevant group if—
a
an asset or liability which represents a loan relationship is transferred in the course of a transfer or merger in relation to which Chapter 13 (European cross-border transfers of business) or Chapter 14 (European cross-border mergers) applies, and
b
the transferee ceases to be a member of the relevant group in consequence of the transfer or merger.
3
In a case where subsection (2) applies, if the transferee becomes a member of another group in consequence of the transfer or merger, it is treated for the purposes of this section and sections 345 and 346 as if the relevant group and the other group were the same.
4
In this section and sections 345 and 346—
- “the relevant 6 year period” means the period of 6 years following—
  1. in a case where section 340 applies because of a transaction within section 336(2) (“case A”), that transaction, or
  2. in a case where section 340 applies because of a series of transactions within section 336(3) (“case B”), the last transaction of that series,
- “the relevant group” means—
  1. in case A, the group mentioned in section 336(2), and
  2. in case B, the group mentioned in section 336(3), and
- “the relevant loan relationship” means the loan relationship mentioned in section 336(1)(b).

Transferee leaving group otherwise than because of exempt distribution
345
1
This section applies if—
a
the transferee ceases to be a member of the relevant group, and
b
it does not so cease just because of a distribution which is exempt as a result of section 1075 of CTA 2010 (exempt distributions).
2
... This Part applies as if—
a
the transferee had assigned the asset or liability representing the relevant loan relationship immediately before ceasing to be a member of the relevant group,
b
the assignment had been for consideration of an amount equal to the fair value of the asset or liability at that time, and
c
the transferee had immediately reacquired the asset or liability for consideration of the same amount.
3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transferee leaving group because of exempt distribution
346
1
This section applies if—
a
the transferee ceases to be a member of the relevant group just because of a distribution which is exempt as a result of section 1075 of CTA 2010 (exempt distributions), and
b
there is a chargeable payment within the meaning of section 1088(1) of CTA 2010 (chargeable payments connected with exempt distributions) within 5 years after the making of that distribution.
2
... This Part applies as if—
a
the transferee had assigned the asset or liability representing the relevant loan relationship immediately before the chargeable payment was made,
b
the assignment had been for consideration of an amount equal to the fair value of the asset or liability immediately before the transferee ceased to be a member of the relevant group, and
c
the transferee had immediately reacquired the asset or liability for consideration of the same amount.
3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Disapplication of Chapter where transferor party to avoidance

Disapplication of Chapter where transferor party to avoidance
347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 5

Connected companies relationships: introduction and general

Introduction: meaning of “connected companies relationship”
348
1
This Chapter contains some general rules relating to connected companies relationships.
2
For the purposes of this Part a debtor relationship of a company is a connected companies relationship if there is a connection between—
a
the company, and
b
another company standing in the position of a creditor as respects the debt in question.
3
For the purposes of subsection (2) a company is treated as standing in the position of a creditor if it indirectly stands in that position by reference to a series of loan relationships or relevant money debts.
4
For the purposes of this Part a creditor relationship of a company is a connected companies relationship if there is a connection between—
a
the company, and
b
another company standing in the position of a debtor as respects the debt in question.
5
For the purposes of subsection (4) a company is treated as standing in the position of a debtor if it indirectly stands in that position by reference to a series of loan relationships or relevant money debts.
6
For the purposes of this Part, if a loan relationship is a connected companies relationship at any time in an accounting period, it is treated as being such a relationship for the period.
7
In this section “relevant money debt” means a money debt which would be a loan relationship if a company directly stood in the position of creditor or debtor.
8
Section 466 (companies connected for an accounting period) applies for the purposes of this section.

Application of amortised cost basis to connected companies relationships
349
1
This section applies if a loan relationship is a connected companies relationship for an accounting period.
2
The credits and debits which are to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of the relationship for the period are determined on an amortised cost basis of accounting.
2A
Where—
a
a company has a hedging relationship between a relevant contract (“the hedging instrument”) and the asset or liability representing the loan relationship, and
b
the loan relationship is dealt with in the company's accounts on the basis of fair value accounting,
it is to be assumed in applying an amortised cost basis of accounting for the purpose of subsection (2) that the hedging instrument has where possible been designated for accounting purposes as a fair value hedge of the loan relationship.
3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Companies beginning to be connected
350. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Companies ceasing to be connected
351. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Disregard of related transactions
352
1
This section applies in an accounting period if—
a
section 349 applies in respect of a creditor relationship of a company for the period, and
b
a related transaction takes place in relation to the relationship in the period.
2
The credits brought into account in respect of the relationship for the period for the purposes of this Part must not be less than they would have been if—
a
the transaction had not taken place, and
b
no amounts had accrued after the transaction took place.
3
The debits brought into account in respect of the loan relationship for the period for the purposes of this Part must not be more than they would have been in that case.
3A
Subsections (2) and (3) do not affect the credits or debits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of changes in the fair value of the asset that are attributable to changes in the corresponding market rate.
3B
Subsection (3A) is subject to section 354 (exclusion of debits for impaired or released connected companies debts).
3C
In relation to a debt, “the corresponding market rate” at any time is the lowest rate at which a company of good financial standing might at that time expect to be able to borrow money at arm's length in the currency applicable to the debt, for repayment at the same time as the debt and otherwise on similar terms.
4
Nothing in this section affects the credits or debits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of exchange gains or losses arising from a debt.

Exclusion of credits on reversal of disregarded loss
352A
1
If as a result of section 352 the debits brought into account by a company in respect of a loan relationship are reduced, no credit is to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part to the extent that it represents the reversal of so much of the loss as was not brought into account as a debit.
2
Nothing in this section affects the credits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of exchange gains or losses resulting from a debt.

Eliminating tax mismatch for loan relationships with qualifying link
352B
1
This section applies if—
a
section 349 applies in respect of a loan relationship of a company for an accounting period (application of amortised cost basis to connected companies relationships),
b
the company is a party to another loan relationship (“the external loan relationship”) in respect of which that section does not apply for the period,
c
the external loan relationship is a debtor relationship dealt with in its accounts on the basis of fair value accounting, and
d
the external loan relationship has a qualifying link with one or more other loan relationships of the company.
2
For this purpose the external loan relationship has “a qualifying link” with one or more other loan relationships of the company if—
a
each of those other loan relationships of the company is a loan relationship in respect of which section 349 applies for the accounting period, and
b
taking those other loan relationships together, the money received by the company under the external loan relationship is wholly or mainly used to lend money under those other loan relationships.
3
The credits and debits which are to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of the external loan relationship for the period are to be determined on an amortised cost basis of accounting.
4
If a company has a hedging relationship between—
a
a relevant contract (“the hedging instrument”), and
b
the liability representing the external loan relationship,
it is to be assumed in applying the amortised cost basis of accounting for the purposes of subsection (3) that the hedging instrument has where possible been designated for accounting purposes as a fair value hedge of that loan relationship.
Chapter 6

Connected companies relationships: impairment losses and releases of debts

Introduction

Introduction to Chapter
353
1
This Chapter contains rules about impairment losses and releases of debts in the case of companies connected with other companies.
2
In particular, see—
a
sections 354 to 357 (which prevent debits in respect of impairment losses and release debits from being brought into account in the case of connected companies relationships, subject to some exceptions),
b
sections 358 to 360 (which exclude credits in respect of the release of debts or the reversal of impairments from being brought into account in that case,subject to some exceptions), and
c
sections 361 to 363 (which treat debt releases as occurring when impaired debts become held by companies which might otherwise benefit from the exclusion under section 358).
3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
Section 466 (companies connected for an accounting period) applies for the purposes of sections 354 to 360.
5
For the circumstances in which companies are connected for sections 361 and 362, see section 363.
6
For the meaning of “impairment loss and release debit” see section 476(1).

Exclusion of debits for impaired or released connected companies debts

Exclusion of debits for impaired or released connected companies debts
354
1
The general rule is that no impairment loss or release debit in respect of a company's creditor relationship is to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part for an accounting period if section 349 (application of amortised cost basis to connected companies relationship) applies to the relationship for the period.
2
That rule is subject to—
a
section 356 (swapping debt for equity), and
b
section 357 (insolvent creditors).
2A
Where the carrying value of an asset representing the creditor relationship has at any time been adjusted as a result of the asset being the hedged item under a designated fair value hedge, the rule in subsection (1) does not prevent a credit or debit being brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of any reversal of that adjustment.
3
Nothing in this section affects the debits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of exchange gains or losses arising from a debt.

Cessation of connection
355
1
This section applies if, in the case of a creditor relationship of a company—
a
an impairment loss or release debit is excluded by section 354 from being brought into account for any accounting period, and
b
there is a later accounting period for which the creditor relationship in respect of the debt is not a connected companies relationship.
2
So far as any amount represents the impairment loss or release debit, no debit may be brought into account in respect of it—
a
for the first accounting period within subsection (1)(b), or
b
for any subsequent such accounting period.

Exception to section 354: swapping debt for equity
356
1
An impairment loss or release debit in relation to a liability to pay any amount to a company (“the creditor company”) under its creditor relationship is not prevented from being brought into account by section 354 if conditions A, B and C are met.
2
Condition A is that the creditor company treats the liability as discharged.
3
Condition B is that it does so in consideration of—
a
any shares forming part of the ordinary share capital of the company on which the liability would otherwise have fallen, or
b
any entitlement to such shares.
4
Condition C is that there would be no connection between the two companies for the accounting period in which the consideration is given if the question whether there is such a connection were determined by reference only to times before the creditor company—
a
acquired possession of the shares, or
b
acquired any entitlement to them.

Exception to section 354: insolvent creditors
357
1
An impairment loss or release debit is not prevented from being brought into account by section 354 in relation to an amount accruing to a company (“the creditor”) if—
a
condition A, B, C, D or E is met in relation to the creditor, and
b
the amount accrues to the creditor at a time which is the relevant time for the condition in question.
2
Condition A is that the creditor is in insolvent liquidation, and for this condition the relevant time is any time in the course of the winding up.
3
Condition B is that the creditor is in insolvent administration, and for this condition the relevant time is any time in the course of the administration.
4
Condition C is that the creditor is in insolvent administrative receivership, and for this condition the relevant time is any time when the appointment of the administrative receiver is in force.
5
Condition D is that an appointment of a provisional liquidator is in force in relation to the creditor under section 135 of the Insolvency Act 1986 (c. 45) or Article 115 of the Insolvency (Northern Ireland) Order 1989 (S.I. 1989/2405 (N.I. 19)), and for this condition the relevant time is any time when the appointment is in force.
6
Condition E is that under the law of a country or territory outside the United Kingdom, circumstances exist corresponding to those described in condition A, B, C or D, and for this condition the relevant time is any time corresponding to that described in the case of the condition in question.
7
Section 323 applies for interpreting this section as it applies for interpreting section 322(6).

Exclusion of credits for connected companies debts on release or reversal of impairments

Exclusion of credits on release of connected companies debts: general
358
1
This section applies if—
a
a liability to pay an amount under a debtor relationship of a company (“D”) is released, and
b
the release takes place in an accounting period for which—
i
an amortised cost basis of accounting is used in respect of the relationship, and
ii
the relationship is a connected companies relationship.
2
D is only required to bring a credit into account in respect of the release for the purposes of this Part if
a
it is a deemed release, or
b
it is a release of relevant rights.
3
In subsection (2) “deemed release” means a release which is deemed to occur because of—
a
section 361 (acquisition of creditor rights by connected company at undervalue), or
b
section 362 (parties becoming connected where creditor's rights subject to impairment adjustment).
4
For the purposes of this section “
relevant rights
” means rights of a company (“C”) that—
a
were acquired by C, before the day on which F(No2)A 2015 was passed, in circumstances that, but for the application of the old corporate rescue exception or the old debt-for-debt exception, would have resulted in a deemed release under section 361(3), or
b
were acquired by another company before that day in such circumstances and transferred to C by way of an assignment or assignments.
4A
In subsection (4)(a)—
a
“
the old corporate rescue exception
” means the exception in section 361A (as it had effect before F(No2)A 2015);
b
“
the old debt-for-debt exception
” means the exception in section 361B (as it had effect before that Act).
5
The amount of the credit that D is required to bring into account in respect of a release of relevant rights is—
a
the amount of the discount received on the acquisition, less
b
the sum of any credits brought into account in respect of that amount (whether in the accounting period in which the release takes place or in a previous accounting period) by C or, in a case within subsection (4)(b), by the company that acquired the rights or any company to which the rights were subsequently assigned.
6
A reference in subsection (5) to the amount of the discount received on the acquisition is to the amount that would have been treated as released under section 361(4) on the acquisition, but for the application of the corporate rescue exception or the debt-for-debt exception.
7
Where the carrying value of a liability representing the debtor relationship has at any time been adjusted as a result of the liability being the hedged item under a designated fair value hedge, this section does not prevent a credit or debit being brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of any reversal of that adjustment.
8
Nothing in this section affects the credits or debits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of exchange gains or losses arising from a debt.

Exclusion of credits on release of connected companies debts during creditor's insolvency
359
1
This section applies if—
a
a liability to pay an amount under a company's debtor relationship is released,
b
the release takes place in an accounting period for which an amortised cost basis of accounting is used in respect of that relationship,
c
condition A, B, C, D or E in section 357 is met in relation to the company releasing the amount,
d
immediately before the time when any of those conditions was first met the relationship was a connected companies relationship, and
e
immediately after that time it was not such a relationship.
2
The company is not required to bring into account a credit in respect of the release for the purposes of this Part.
3
Where the carrying value of a liability representing the debtor relationship has at any time been adjusted as a result of the liability being the hedged item under a designated fair value hedge, this section does not prevent a credit being brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of any reversal of that adjustment.

Exclusion of credits on reversal of impairments of connected companies debts
360
1
If an impairment loss is prevented from being brought into account by section 354, no credit in respect of any reversal of the impairment may be brought into account for the purposes of this Part.
2
Nothing in this section affects the credits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of exchange gains or losses arising from a debt.

Deemed debt releases on impaired debts becoming held by connected company

Acquisition of creditor rights by connected company at undervalue
361
1
This section applies if—
a
a company (“D”) is a party to a loan relationship as debtor,
b
another company (“C”) becomes a party to it as creditor,
c
immediately after it does so C and D are connected,
d
in a case where the person from whom C acquires its rights under the loan relationship is a company, in the period of account in which C acquires them there is no connection between C and that company,
e
the amount or value of any consideration given by C for the acquisition is less than the pre-acquisition carrying value (see subsection (5)), and
f
the equity-for-debt exception (see section 361C) does not apply.
2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
C is treated as releasing its rights under the loan relationship when it acquires them.
4
The amount treated as released is the amount of the difference referred to in subsection (1)(e).
5
In subsection (1)(e) “the pre-acquisition carrying value” means the amount which would be the carrying value of the liability under the loan relationship in D's accounts if a period of account had ended immediately before C became a party to it.
6
For the purposes of subsection (5) the carrying value is determined taking no account of—
a
accrued amounts, or
b
amounts paid or received in advance.
7
Subsections (3) and (4) are subject to section 361D (corporate rescue: debt released shortly after acquisition).

The corporate rescue exception
361A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The debt-for-debt exception
361B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The equity-for-debt exception
361C
1
For the purposes of section 361 the “equity-for-debt exception” applies if the following two conditions are met.
2
The first condition is that the acquisition is an arm's length transaction.
3
The second condition is that the consideration given by C for the acquisition consists only of—
a
shares forming part of the ordinary share capital of C,
b
shares forming part of the ordinary share capital of a company connected with C, or
c
an entitlement to shares within paragraph (a) or (b).

Corporate rescue: debt released shortly after acquisition
361D
1
This section applies if—
a
the case is one in which section 361 would otherwise apply,
b
within 60 days after C becomes a party to the loan relationship as creditor, C or a company connected with C releases D's liability to pay an amount under the loan relationship, and
c
the corporate rescue conditions are met.
2
If the release is of the whole debt, section 361 does not apply to the acquisition of the rights by C.
3
If the release is of part of the debt, the amount that C is treated by section 361 as having released when it acquired the rights under the loan relationship is reduced (but not below nil) by the amount that is actually released as mentioned in subsection (1)(b).
4
The corporate rescue conditions are—
a
that the acquisition by C of its rights under the loan relationship is an arm's length transaction,
b
that immediately before C became a party to the loan relationship as creditor, it was reasonable to assume that, without the release and any arrangements of which the release forms part, there would be a material risk that at some time within the next 12 months the company would have been unable to pay its debts.
5
For the purposes of subsection (4)(b), a company is unable to pay its debts if—
a
it is unable to pay its debts as they fall due, or
b
the value of the company's assets is less than the amount of its liabilities, taking into account its contingent and prospective liabilities.

Parties becoming connected where creditor's rights subject to impairment adjustment etc
362
1
This section applies if—
a
a company (“D”) is a party to a loan relationship as debtor, and
b
another company (“C”) which—
i
is a party to the loan relationship as creditor, and
ii
is not connected with D,
becomes connected with D, ...
c. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
C is treated as releasing its rights under the loan relationship when C and D become connected.
3
The amount treated as released is the amount (if any) by which the pre-connection carrying value in D's accounts exceeds the pre-connection carrying value in C's accounts.
4
In subsection (3)—
- “
the pre-connection carrying value in D's accounts
” means the amount that would be the carrying value of the liability representing the loan relationship in D's accounts if a period of account had ended immediately before C and D became connected, and
- “
the pre-connection carrying value in C's accounts
” means—
  1. in any case where C was a party to the loan relationship as creditor on the last day of the period of account ending immediately before the one in which C and D became connected, the cost of the asset representing the loan relationship which would be given on that day on an amortised cost basis of accounting, and
  2. in any other case, the amount or value of any consideration given by C for the acquisition of the asset representing the loan relationship.
5
For the purposes of subsection (4) no account is to be taken of—
a
accrued amounts, or
b
amounts paid or received in advance, ...
c. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
Subsections (2) and (3) are subject to section 362A (corporate rescue: debt released shortly after connection arises).

Corporate rescue: debt released shortly after connection arises
362A
1
This section applies if—
a
the case is one in which section 362 would otherwise apply,
b
within 60 days after C and D become connected, C releases D's liability to pay an amount under the loan relationship, and
c
the corporate rescue conditions are met.
2
If the release is of the whole debt, section 362 does not apply by reason of C and D becoming connected.
3
If the release is of part of the debt, the amount that C is treated by section 362 as having released when it became connected with D is reduced (but not below nil) by the amount actually released.
4
The corporate rescue conditions are—
a
that C and D became connected as a result of an arm's length transaction, and
b
that immediately before C and D became connected it was reasonable to assume that, without the connection and any arrangements of which the connection forms part, there would be a material risk that at some time within the next 12 months D would have been unable to pay its debts.
5
For the purposes of subsection (4)(b), a company is unable to pay its debts if—
a
it is unable to pay its debts as they fall due, or
b
the value of the company's assets is less than the amount of its liabilities, taking into account its contingent and prospective liabilities.

Companies connected for sections 361 to 362A
363
1
For the purposes of sections 361 to 362A there is a connection between two companies at any time if condition A or B is met at that time.
2
Condition A is that one company has control of the other.
3
Condition B is that both companies are under the control of the same person (but see subsection (6)).
4
For the purposes of sections 361 to 362A there is a connection between two companies in a period of account if there is a connection between them (within subsection (1)) at any time in the period.
5
Section 472 (meaning of “control”) applies for the purposes of this section.
6
Condition B is not taken to be met just because two companies have been under the control of—
a
the Crown,
b
a Minister of the Crown,
c
a government department,
d
a Northern Ireland department,
e
a foreign sovereign power, or
f
an international organisation.
7
Section 468 (connection between companies to be ignored in some circumstances) applies for the purposes of this section as it applies for the purposes of the provisions which apply section 466, taking references in sections 468 and 469 to the accounting period as references to the period of account.
8
For the meaning of “international organisation”, see section 476(2) and (3).

Arrangements for avoiding section 361 or 362
363A
1
This section applies in any case where arrangements are entered into and the main purpose, or one of the main purposes, of any party in entering into them (or any part of them) is—
a
to avoid an amount being treated as released under section 361 or 362, or
b
to reduce the amount which is treated as released under section 361 or 362.
2
The arrangements (or part of the arrangements) are not to achieve that effect (so that an amount, or a greater amount, falls to be treated as released under section 361 or 362).
3
In this section “
arrangements
” includes any agreement, understanding, scheme, transaction or series of transactions (whether or not legally enforceable).
Chapter 7

Group relief claims involving impaired or released consortium debts

Introduction to Chapter
364
1
This Chapter applies if—
a
there is (or was) a relevant consortium creditor relationship (see subsection (2)), and
b
either—
i
an impairment loss is or has been brought into account for the purposes of this Part for any group accounting period by the creditor, or
ii
a debit in respect of a release of liability under the relationship is or has been so brought into account.
2
For the purposes of this Chapter a relationship is a relevant consortium creditor relationship if—
a
it is a creditor relationship of—
i
a company (the “member company”), which is a member of a consortium by which a consortium company is owned, or
ii
a company (a “group member”) which is a member of the same group of companies as the member company but is not itself a member of the consortium, and
b
the consortium company or, if that company is a holding company, a consortium company which is a subsidiary of that company is (or was) the debtor (the “debtor consortium company”).
3
The provisions of this Chapter—
a
reduce debits for impairment losses and release debits under relevant consortium creditor relationships where an amount surrendered as group relief by the consortium company is claimed by a member company or group member (see section 365),
b
provide for a corresponding reduction in credits in respect of such relationships where a reduction within paragraph (a) has occurred (see section 367),
c
reduce claims for group relief where debits within paragraph (a) for earlier group accounting periods exceed reductions within paragraph (b) (see section 368), and
d
provide for such claims to be carried forward where they exceed such debits (see section 369).
4
In this Chapter “release debit” means a debit in respect of a release of liability under a relevant consortium creditor relationship, and
“
group relief
” means—
1. group relief under Part 5 of CTA 2010 (see section 97(2) of that Act), and
2. group relief for carried-forward losses under Part 5A of CTA 2010 (see section 188AA(4) of that Act).
5
If section 143, 144 or 188DH of CTA 2010 (which limit the amount of group relief to be given in certain cases involving a consortium) applies, effect must be given to that section before effect is given to this Chapter.
6
Expressions defined in this section have the same meaning in the other provisions of this Chapter, and sections 370 and 371 also apply for the interpretation of this Chapter.
7
For the meaning of “impairment loss” see section 476(1).

Reduction of impairment loss debits where group relief claimed
365
1
This section applies for any group accounting period for which there is a net consortium debit.
2
For the purposes of this Chapter there is a net consortium debit for a group accounting period if—
a
the total of the impairment losses and release debits brought into account for that period in respect of relevant consortium creditor relationships by—
i
the member company, and
ii
every group member,
exceeds
b
the total credits so brought into account by them in connection with debts owed by the companies which are the debtor consortium companies in respect of those relationships.
3
The net consortium debit is equal to that excess.
4
If there is a claim for that group accounting period by the member company or a group member for group relief in respect of an amount which may be surrendered as group relief by the debtor consortium companies, the debits brought into account in respect of the impairment losses and the release debits mentioned in subsection (2)(a) are reduced.
5
The amount of reduction in the case of each of the debits referred to in subsection (4) (“the relevant debits”) is calculated as follows.
Step 1
Find the total amount which—
a
may be surrendered as group relief by the debtor consortium companies, and
b
is claimed as group relief for the group accounting period by the member company or any group member.
Step 2
If the amount found at Step 1 does not exceed the net consortium debit, apportion the amount found at Step 1 between the relevant debits in proportion to their respective amounts.
If the amount found at Step 1 exceeds the net consortium debit, apportion so much of the amount found at Step 1 as does not exceed it between the relevant debits in proportion to their respective amounts.
6
This section is subject to section 366.

Effect where credit for release brought into account on amortised cost basis
366
1
This section applies if—
a
a company releases liability under a relevant consortium creditor relationship of the company (“the release amount”), and
b
the debtor consortium company brings into account an amount in respect of the release for any accounting period in accordance with an amortised cost basis of accounting.
2
An amount equal to the release amount is treated for the purposes of this Chapter as not being a debit brought into account for that period in relation to the relevant consortium creditor relationship.

Reduction of credits exceeding impairment losses
367
1
This section applies if, apart from this section, for any group accounting period—
a
the total of the impairment losses and release debits brought into account for that period in respect of relevant consortium creditor relationships by—
i
the member company, and
ii
every group member,
is less than
b
the total credits so brought into account by them in connection with debts owed by the companies which are the debtor consortium companies in respect of those relationships.
2
Those credits are reduced (but not below nil) in accordance with subsection (3).
3
The amount of reduction in the case of each credit is calculated as follows.
Step 1
Find the total amount by which the debits in respect of the relationships for previous group accounting periods have been reduced under section 365(4).
Step 2
Deduct the total amount by which credits have previously been reduced under this section from the amount found at Step 1.
Step 3
Apportion the amount found at Step 2 between the credits in proportion to their respective amounts.

Reduction of claims where there are earlier net consortium debits
368
1
This section applies if—
a
for any group accounting period there is a claim by the member company or a group member for group relief in respect of an amount which may be surrendered as group relief by debtor consortium companies, and
b
the total amount of the net consortium debits for earlier group accounting periods in respect of the relevant consortium creditor relationships exceeds any reductions in respect of those debits falling to be made under section 365(4).
2
In this section that excess is referred to as “the unreduced debits amount”.
3
If—
a
the claim is the only claim for that period, and
b
it exceeds the unreduced debits amount,
the claim is reduced by the unreduced debits amount.
4
If—
a
the claim is not the only claim for that period, and
b
the total of the claims exceeds the unreduced debits amount,
the claim is reduced by the same proportion of the unreduced debits amount as the claim bears to that total.
5
In any other case, the claim is reduced to nil.

Carry forward of claims where there are no net consortium debits
369
1
This section applies if for any group accounting period there is—
a
a claim by the member company or a group member for group relief in respect of an amount which may be surrendered as group relief by debtor consortium companies (as reduced under section 368, if it applies), and
b
no net consortium debit in respect of the relevant consortium creditor relationships.
2
The claim (as so reduced) is carried forward and treated for the purposes of section 365—
a
as increasing any such claim for group relief made by the claimant company for its next accounting period, or
b
if apart from this subsection there would be no such claim, as being such a claim.

Group accounting periods
370
1
In this Chapter “group accounting period” means—
a
any accounting period of the member company beginning on or after 1 October 2002, or
b
any accounting period of a group member which—
i
begins on or after that date, and
ii
corresponds to such an accounting period of the member company.
2
Any such accounting period of the member company and any such corresponding accounting periods of group members are treated for the purposes of this Chapter as being the same accounting period.
3
For the purposes of this Chapter an accounting period of a group member corresponds to an accounting period of the member company if condition A, B or C is met.
4
Condition A is that the periods coincide.
5
Condition B is that the accounting period of the member company includes more than half of the accounting period of the group member.
6
Condition C is that—
a
the accounting period of the member company includes part of the accounting period of the group member, and
b
the remainder of that period is not within any accounting period of the member company.

Interpretation
371
1
In this Chapter—
- “
consortium company
” means a trading company, as defined by section 185(1) of CTA 2010, that is owned by a consortium or a holding company that is so owned,
- “debtor consortium company” has the same meaning as in section 364 (see section 364(2)),
- “group accounting period” is to be read in accordance with section 370,
- “group member” has the same meaning as in section 364 (see section 364(2)),
- “
group relief
” has the meaning given by section 364(4),
- “
holding company
” has the same meaning as in Part 5 of CTA 2010 (see section 185(2) of that Act),
- “member”, in relation to a consortium, has the same meaning as in Part 5 of CTA 2010 (see section 153(2) of that Act),
- “member company” has the same meaning as in section 364 (see section 364(2)),
- “net consortium debit” is to be read in accordance with section 365(2) and (3),
- “relevant consortium creditor relationship” is to be read in accordance with section 364(2), and
- “subsidiary”, in relation to a company which is a holding company, means a trading company (as defined by section 185(1) of CTA 2010) that, by reference to that holding company, is owned by a consortium by virtue of section 153(3) of that Act.
2
Any reference in this Chapter to a company being owned by a consortium is to be read in accordance with section 153 of CTA 2010.
3
Any reference in this Chapter to two companies being members of the same group of companies is a reference to those companies being members of the same group of companies for the purposes of Part 5 of CTA 2010 (group relief) (see section 152 of that Act).
Chapter 8

Connected parties relationships: late interest

Introduction to Chapter
372
1
This Chapter makes provision about the debits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in cases where certain conditions relating to interest that is not paid or is paid late are met and there is a connection between the parties to the loan relationship.
2
For those conditions and the rule that applies in those cases, see section 373 (late interest treated as not accruing until paid in some cases).
3
For the kinds of connections where the rule applies, see—
a. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
b
section 375 (loans to close companies by participators etc), and
c. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
d
section 378 (loans by trustees of occupational pension schemes).
4
For the meaning of “standing in the position of a creditor” in this Chapter, see section 379(1) (persons indirectly standing in the position of creditor).

Late interest treated as not accruing until paid in some cases
373
1
Debits relating to interest payable under a company's debtor relationship are to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part on the assumption that the interest does not accrue until it is paid if—
a
conditions A and B are met, and
b
the case is within section 375 or 378.
2
Condition A is that the interest is not paid within the period of 12 months following the end of the accounting period in which it would be treated as accruing apart from subsection (1).
3
Condition B is that credits representing the full amount of the interest are not brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of the corresponding creditor relationship for any accounting period.
4
For the meaning of “corresponding creditor relationship” in cases where persons indirectly stand in the position of creditor, see section 379(2).
5
References in this Chapter to “the actual accrual period” are references to the accounting period in which the interest would be treated as accruing apart from subsection (1).

Connection between debtor and person standing in position of creditor
374. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loans to close companies by participators etc
375
1
The case to which this section applies is where—
a
there is a time in the actual accrual period when the close company conditions are met, and
b
neither the CIS-based close company conditions nor the CIS limited partnership conditions are met
and, where subsection (4A) applies, the non-qualifying territory condition is met.
2
The close company conditions are that—
a
the company which has the debtor relationship (“D”) is a close company, and
b
a person (“C”) standing in the position of creditor as respects the loan relationship is—
i
a participator in D,
ii
the associate of a person who is participator in D,
iii
a company of which a participator in D has control,
iv
a company in which a participator in D has a major interest,
v
a person who controls a company which is a participator in D,
vi
the associate of a person within sub-paragraph (v), or
vii
a company controlled by a person within sub-paragraph (v).
3
The CIS-based close company conditions are that—
a
D is a CIS-based close company at all times when the close company conditions are met,
b
C is not resident for tax purposes in a non-qualifying territory at any such time, and
c
D is a small or medium-sized enterprise for the actual accrual period.
4
The CIS limited partnership conditions are that—
a
the debt is one which is owed to, or to persons acting for, a CIS limited partnership,
b
no member of that partnership is resident for tax purposes in a non-qualifying territory at any time in the actual accrual period,
c
D has received written notice from the partnership containing information from which it appears that the condition in paragraph (b) is met, and
d
D is a small or medium-sized enterprise for the actual accrual period.
4A
This subsection applies if C is a company; and the non-qualifying territory condition is that C is—
a
resident for tax purposes in a non-qualifying territory at any time in the actual accrual period, or
b
effectively managed in a non-taxing non-qualifying territory at any such time.
5
Section 376 applies for the interpretation of this section.

Interpretation of section 375
376
1
For the purposes of section 375 and this section, Chapter 2 of Part 10 of CTA 2010 (meaning of “close company”) applies with the omission of section 442(a) (exclusion of non-resident companies).
2
A person who is a participator in a company which controls another company is treated for the purposes of section 375 and this section as being a participator in that other company also.
3
Subject to that, in section 375 and this section “participator”, in relation to a company, means a person who is a participator in the company within the meaning given by section 454 of CTA 2010, but not a person who is such a participator just because of being a loan creditor of the company.
4
Section 472 (meaning of “control”) applies for the purposes of section 375 and this section.
5
In section 375—
- “CIS-based close company” means a company which would not be a close company apart from the rights and powers of one or more partners in a CIS limited partnership being attributed to another of the partners under section 451(4) to (6) of CTA 2010 because of section 448(1)(a) of that Act,
- “CIS limited partnership” means a limited partnership—
  1. which is a collective investment scheme, or
  2. which would be a collective investment scheme if it were not a body corporate,
- “non-qualifying territory” has the meaning given by section 173 of TIOPA 2010,
- “
resident for tax purposes
” means liable, under the law of the non-qualifying territory, to tax there by reason of domicile, residence or place of management, and
- “small or medium-sized enterprise” has the meaning given by section 172 of TIOPA 2010.
6
For the purposes of section 375, a non-qualifying territory is “non-taxing” if companies are not under its law liable to tax by reason of domicile, residence or place of management.

Party to loan relationship having major interest in other party
377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loans by trustees of occupational pension schemes
378
1
The case to which this section applies is where—
a
the loan is one made by trustees of an occupational pension scheme, and
b
condition A, B or C is met.
2
Condition A is that there is a time in the actual accrual period when the company which has the debtor relationship (“D”) is the employer of employees to whom the scheme relates.
3
Condition B is that there is a connection between D and such an employer for the actual accrual period.
4
Condition C is that a company is such an employer and there is a time in the actual accrual period when—
a
D has a major interest in that company, or
b
that company has a major interest in D.
5
In this section “occupational pension scheme” has the meaning given in section 150(5) of FA 2004.
6
Section 466 (companies connected for an accounting period) applies for the purposes of this section.

Persons indirectly standing in the position of creditor
379
1
For the purposes of this Chapter a person is treated as standing in the position of a creditor as respects a loan relationship if the person indirectly stands in that position by reference to a series of loan relationships or relevant money debts.
2
If—
a
a person (“C”) indirectly stands in the position of creditor as respects a loan relationship by reference to such a series of relationships or debts, and
b
section 373 (late interest treated as not accruing until paid in some cases) applies in relation to the debtor relationship because of subsection (1),
the reference in section 373(3) to the corresponding creditor relationship is a reference to C's creditor relationship.
3
In subsection (1) “relevant money debt” means a money debt which would be a loan relationship if a company directly stood in the position of creditor or debtor.
Chapter 9

Partnerships involving companies

Partnerships involving companies
380
1
This section applies if—
a
a trade or business is carried on by a firm,
b
any of the partners in the firm is a company (a “company partner”), and
c
a money debt is owed by or to the firm.
2
In calculating the profits and losses of the trade or business for corporation tax purposes under section 1259 (calculation of firm's profits or losses), no credits or debits may be brought into account under this Part—
a
in relation to the money debt, or
b
in relation to any loan relationship that would fall to be treated for the purposes of the calculation as arising from the money debt.
3
Instead, each company partner must bring credits and debits into account under this Part in relation to the debt or relationship for each of its accounting periods in which the conditions in subsection (1) are met.
4
The following provisions of this Chapter contain special rules about the credits and debits to be brought into account under subsection (3)—
a
section 381 (determinations of credits and debits by company partners: general),
b
section 382 (company partners using fair value accounting),
c
section 383 (lending between partners and the partnership),
d
section 384 (treatment of exchange gains and losses), and
e
section 385 (company partners' shares where firm owns deeply discounted securities).
5
In those provisions “company partner” has the same meaning as in this section.

Determinations of credits and debits by company partners: general
381
1
The credits and debits to be brought into account under section 380(3) are to be determined separately for each company partner as follows.
2
The money debt owed by or to the firm is treated as if—
a
it were owed by or, as the case may be, to the company partner, and
b
it were so owed for the purposes of the trade or business which the company partner carries on.
3
If the money debt arises from a transaction for the lending of money—
a
it continues to be treated as so arising, and
b
accordingly the company partner is treated as having a loan relationship.
4
Anything done by or in relation to the firm in connection with the money debt is treated as done by or in relation to the company partner.
5
The credits and debits in the case of each company partner are the partner's appropriate share of the total credits and debits determined in accordance with subsections (2) to (4) (without any reduction for the fact that the debt is treated as owed by or to each company partner).
6
A company partner's “appropriate share” is the share that would be apportioned to it on the assumption in subsection (7).
7
The assumption is that the total credits and debits determined in accordance with subsections (2) to (4) are apportioned between the partners in the shares in which any profit or loss would be apportioned between them in accordance with the firm's profit-sharing arrangements.

Company partners using fair value accounting
382
1
This section applies if a company partner uses fair value accounting in relation to its interest in the firm.
2
The credits and debits to be brought into account by the company partner under section 380(3) are to be determined on the basis of fair value accounting.

Lending between partners and the partnership
383
1
This section applies if—
a
the money debt owed by or to the firm arises from a transaction for the lending of money, and
b
there is a time in an accounting period of a company partner (“the relevant accounting period”) when conditions A, B and C are met.
2
Condition A is that—
a
if the debt is owed by the firm, the company partner stands in the position of a creditor and accordingly has a creditor relationship, and
b
if the debt is owed to the firm, the company partner stands in the position of a debtor and accordingly has a debtor relationship.
3
Condition B is that the company partner controls the firm either alone or taken together with one or more other company partners connected with the company partner (see subsection (7)).
4
Condition C is that the company partner or any other company partner is treated under section 381(3) as if—
a
it had the debtor relationship which corresponds to the creditor relationship mentioned in subsection (2)(a), or
b
it had the creditor relationship which corresponds to the debtor relationship mentioned in subsection (2)(b).
5
If this section applies, for the purposes of this Part for the relevant accounting period there is taken to be a connection between—
a
the company partner, and
b
each company partner that is within subsection (4) (including the company partner itself if it is within that subsection),
as a result of one of them having control of the other at a time in the period for the purposes of section 466(2).
6
The provisions of this Part about connected companies relationships apply accordingly.
7
For the purposes of subsection (3), one company partner is connected with another at any time in an accounting period if at that or any other time in the accounting period—
a
one controls the other, or
b
both are under the control of the same person.
8
Section 472 (meaning of “control”) applies for the purposes of subsection (7) (but see section 1124 of CTA 2010 for the meaning of “control” in subsection (3)).

Treatment of exchange gains and losses
384
1
Whether credits and debits in respect of exchange gains and losses are to be brought into account by a company partner under this Chapter as a result of section 328(1), or that section is disapplied by section 328(3), depends on the firm's accounts.
2
Section 328(3) applies only so far as exchange gains and losses are recognised in the firm's statement of total recognised gains and losses, statement of recognised income and expense, statement of changes in equity or statement of income and retained earnings.
3
Accordingly, a company partner must bring credits and debits into account under this Chapter in respect of exchange gains and losses which are not so recognised.
4
For the meaning of references in this section to exchange gains and losses, see section 475.

Company partners' shares where firm owns deeply discounted securities
385
1
This section applies if the firm holds a deeply discounted security.
2
Each partner is treated for the purposes of this Chapter as beneficially entitled to the share of the security specified in subsection (3).
3
That share is the share to which the partner would be entitled if—
a
all the partners were companies, and
b
the security were apportioned in the shares in which any profit or loss would be apportioned between them in accordance with the firm's profit-sharing arrangements.
4
In this section “deeply discounted security” has the same meaning as in Chapter 8 of Part 4 of ITTOIA 2005 (profits from deeply discounted securities) (see section 430 of that Act).
Chapter 10

Insurance companies

Introduction

Overview of Chapter
386
1
This Chapter contains special rules about the treatment of the loan relationships of insurance companies.
2
In particular, it—
a
provides for special rules to apply for the purposes of the I - E rules in relation to an insurance company's non-trading deficits referable to BLAGAB instead of those in Chapter 16 (see sections 387 to 391), and
b
excludes some loan relationships of corporate members of Lloyd's from this Part (see section 392), ...
c. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
For further special rules affecting insurance companies, see—
a
section 298(3) (under which activities carried on by a company in the course of mutual insurance business which is not life assurance business ... are treated as not constituting a trade or part of a trade) and section 88 of FA 2012 (equivalent rule for activities carried on in the course of BLAGAB),
b
Chapter 4 (continuity of treatment on transfers within groups or on reorganisations), and, in particular, sections 335(1) and (2), 336(4) and 337,
c
section 405 (certain non-UK residents with interest on 3½% War Loan 1952 Or After),
d
sections 468 and 471 (connection between creditor and debtor companies to be ignored in some cases where creditor is insurance company carrying on BLAGAB),
e
section 483(6) (treatment of deferred acquisition costs and provision for unearned premiums or for unexpired risks as a money debt for the purposes of Chapter 2 of Part 6 in the case of companies carrying on insurance business), and
f
section 486(4) (no exchange gains or losses to arise for the purposes of that Chapter where relevant debts prevented from being deductible as ordinary BLAGAB management expenses).
4
In this Chapter “BLAGAB” means basic life assurance and general annuity business.

Treatment of deficit on basic life assurance and general annuity business

Treatment of deficit on basic life assurance and general annuity business: introduction
387
1
Sections 388 to 391 apply for the purposes of the I - E rules instead of Chapters 16 and 16A (non-trading deficits) if a company has a non-trading deficit from its loan relationships for BLAGAB for any accounting period.
2
In those sections “the deficit” and “the deficit period” mean that deficit and that period respectively.

Basic rule: deficit set off against income and gains of deficit period
388
1
The basic rule is that the deficit must be set off against any income and gains of the deficit period which are referable to BLAGAB.
2
The income and gains are reduced accordingly.
3
Any such reduction is made in accordance with step 4 in section 73 of FA 2012 (that is to say, before any deduction for the adjusted BLAGAB management expenses of the company for the deficit period).

Claim to carry back deficit
389
1
If the deficit exceeds the income and gains for the deficit period referred to in section 388(1), the company may make a claim for the whole or part of the excess (“the claim amount”)—
a
to be carried back for up to 3 accounting periods ending within the permitted period, and
b
to be set off against the available profits of the company in those periods in accordance with subsection (2).
2
The claim amount reduces the company's available profits in the most recent accounting period of the company, before any remainder reduces those in the next most recent accounting period and then those in the next most recent accounting period.
2A
If any of the claim amount is carried back in accordance with this section to an accounting period, the amount which is so carried back is to be left out of account for the purpose of applying section 93 of FA 2012 in the case of that period.
3
For the meaning of “available profits”, see section 390.
4
In this section and that section “permitted period” means the period of 12 months immediately before the deficit period.
5
A claim under this section must be made—
a
within the period of 2 years after the end of the deficit period, or
b
within such further period as an officer of Revenue and Customs allows.

Meaning of “available profits”
390
1
For the purposes of section 389 the available profits of the company for an accounting period are its BLAGAB non-trading loan relationships profits for the period (see subsection (4)), less the unused part of the relevant deductions for the period (see subsection (5)).
2
If an accounting period ending within the permitted period begins before it, only a part of the amount which would otherwise be the available profit for that accounting period is available profit.
3
That part is so much as is proportionate to the part of the accounting period in the permitted period.
4
References in this section to a company's BLAGAB non-trading loan relationships profits for an accounting period are references to the amount (if any) of the BLAGAB credits in respect of the company's loan relationships that count as income for the purposes of the I - E rules for that period (as determined by section 88(3) and (4) of FA 2012).
5
The unused part of the relevant deductions for an accounting period is found as follows.
Step 1
Add together—
a
the amount for the purposes of section 73 of FA 2012 of the adjusted BLAGAB management expenses of the company for the period, and
b
so much of the sum of the deductions made in the case of the company in respect of qualifying charitable donations for that period as is referable to BLAGAB.
Step 2
Add together—
a
so much of the amount for the purposes of section 73 of FA 2012 of the adjusted BLAGAB management expenses of the company for the period as, on the assumption that the company had no BLAGAB non-trading loan relationships profits for the period, could be subtracted at step 6 under that section without producing a negative amount, and
b
the total amounts referable to BLAGAB which could be applied for the period in making deductions in respect of qualifying charitable donations if those profits were disregarded.
Step 3
Subtract the amount found at Step 2 from the amount found at Step 1.
The result is the unused part of the relevant deductions for the accounting period.
6
In the case of any claim under section 389, references in subsection (5) to the amount for the purposes of section 73 of FA 2012 of the adjusted BLAGAB management expenses of the company for the period are references to that amount as determined on the assumptions in subsections (7) and (8).
7
The first assumption is that no account is taken of—
a
that claim, or
b
any other claim under section 389 relating to a deficit for an accounting period after the deficit period.
8
The second assumption is that all such adjustments are made as are required as a result of any sum having been carried back under the Corporation Tax Acts to the accounting period mentioned in subsection (5), otherwise than as a result of—
a
the claim mentioned in subsection (6), or
b
any such other claim as is mentioned in subsection (7)(b).

Carry forward of surplus deficit to next accounting period
391
1
This rule applies if any of the deficit is not—
a
set off against the income and gains referred to in section 388(1), or
b
set off against the profits referred to in section 389(1) as the result of a claim under that section.
2
That deficit must be carried forward to the accounting period immediately after the deficit period (“the next period”).
3
Any deficit so carried forward is treated for the purposes of section 76 of FA 2012 as a deemed BLAGAB management expense for the next period.

Exclusion of loan relationships of members of Lloyd's

Exclusion of loan relationships of members of Lloyd's
392
1
This section applies to any loan relationship of a corporate member of Lloyd's.
2
This Part does not apply as respects the relationship so far as rights or liabilities under it or securities representing it are—
a
assets forming part of the member's premium trust fund, or
b
liabilities attached to that fund.
3
In this section “corporate member” and “premium trust fund” have the same meaning as in Chapter 5 of Part 4 of FA 1994 (Lloyd's underwriters: corporations etc) (see section 230(1) of that Act).
...

General rules for some debtor relationships
393. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Special rules for some debtor relationships
394. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 11

Other special kinds of company

Investment trusts' and venture capital trusts' creditor relationships

Investment trusts: profits or losses of a capital nature
395
1
Profits or losses of a capital nature arising to an investment trust from a creditor relationship may not be brought into account as credits or debits for the purposes of this Part.
2
For the purposes of this section “profits or losses of a capital nature” means profits or losses that—
a
are accounted for through the capital column of the income statement in accordance with the Statement of Recommended Practice, or
b
would have been so accounted for if that Statement had been applied correctly.
3
“The Statement of Recommended Practice”, in relation to an accounting period for which it is required or permitted to be used, means—
a
the Statement of Recommended Practice relating to Investment Trust Companies, issued by the Association of Investment Trust Companies in January 2003, as from time to time modified, amended or revised, or
b
any subsequent Statement of Recommended Practice relating to investment trusts, as from time to time modified, amended or revised.
4
The Treasury may by order amend the definition of “profits or losses of a capital nature” in subsection (2), so far as it applies in relation to an investment trust that prepares accounts in accordance with international accounting standards.
5
An order under subsection (4) may make—
a
different provision for different cases, and
b
incidental, supplemental, consequential and transitional provision and savings.

Venture capital trusts: profits or losses of a capital nature
396
1
Profits or losses of a capital nature arising to a venture capital trust from a creditor relationship may not be brought into account as credits or debits for the purposes of this Part.
2
For the purposes of this section “profits or losses of a capital nature” means profits or losses that—
a
are accounted for through the capital column of the income statement in accordance with the Statement of Recommended Practice, or
b
would have been so accounted for if the venture capital trust had been an investment trust and that Statement had been applied correctly.
3
In this section “the Statement of Recommended Practice” has the meaning given in section 395(3) (investment trusts: profits or losses of a capital nature).
4
The Treasury may by order amend the definition of “profits or losses of a capital nature” in subsection (2), so far as it applies in relation to a venture capital trust that prepares accounts in accordance with international accounting standards.
5
An order under subsection (4) may make—
a
different provision for different cases, and
b
incidental, supplemental, consequential and transitional provision and savings.

Credit unions

Credit unions
397
1
In calculating the income of a credit union for any accounting period, no credit is to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of a loan relationship of the union if a member of the union stands in the position of debtor in relation to the debt in question.
2
But subsection (1) does not apply if the credit union—
a
is obliged to make a return under section 887(2) of ITA 2007 for the accounting period, and
b
has not done so within—
i
3 months after the end of the period, or
ii
such longer period as an officer of Revenue and Customs allows.
3
No debit is to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of a loan relationship of a credit union if a member of the union stands in the position of creditor in relation to the debt in question.
Chapter 12

Special rules for particular kinds of securities

Introduction

Overview of Chapter
398
1
This Chapter sets out rules relating to the holding of particular kinds of securities.
2
In particular, see—
a
sections 399 to 400C (index-linked gilt-edged securities),
aa
sections 401 to 405 (other gilt-edged securities),
b
sections 406 to 412 (deeply discounted securities: connected companies and close companies),
c
sections 413 and 414 (funding bonds),
d
sections 415 to 419 (derivatives), ...
e
section 420 (assumptions where options etc apply), and
f
section 420A (hybrid capital instruments).
3
For other special rules about deeply discounted securities, see section 385 (company partners' shares where firm owns deeply discounted securities).

Index-linked gilt-edged securities

Basic rules
399
1
This section applies if a loan relationship is represented by an index-linked gilt-edged security.
2
The amounts to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part are to be determined using fair value accounting.
3
For provision requiring adjustments to be made to amounts determined under subsection (2), see sections 400 to 400C (adjustments for changes in index).
4
In this section and sections 400 to 400C—
- “
index-linked gilt-edged securities
” means any gilt-edged securities under which the amounts of the payments are determined wholly or partly by reference to an index of prices published by the Statistics Board;
- “
relevant prices index
”, in relation to an index-linked gilt-edged security, means the index of prices by reference to which the amounts of the payments under the security are wholly or partly determined.
5
For the meaning of “gilt-edged securities”, see section 476(1).
6
In the case of insurance companies, the application of sections 400 to 400C is subject to section 112 of FA 2012.

Adjustments for changes in index
400
1
This section applies if—
a
an amount to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of an index-linked gilt-edged security falls to be determined by reference to its value at two different times, and
b
there is a change in the relevant prices index between the earlier and the later time.
2
If that change is an increase, the carrying value of the security at the earlier time is increased by the same percentage as the percentage increase in the relevant prices index between those times.
2A
Subsection (2) is subject to sections
400A
to
400C
(relevant hedging schemes).
3
If that change is a reduction, the carrying value of the security at the earlier time is reduced by the same percentage as the percentage reduction in the relevant prices index between those times.
4
The Treasury may, in relation to any description of index-linked gilt-edged securities, by order provide that—
a
there are to be no adjustments under this section, or
b
an adjustment specified in the order is to be made instead.
5
An order under subsection (4)—
a
may not apply to a security issued before the making of the order, but
b
may make different provision for different descriptions of securities.
6
The general rule is that the percentage increase or reduction in the relevant prices index is determined for the purposes of this section by reference to the difference between—
a
the index for the month in which the earlier time falls, and
b
the index for the month in which the later time falls.
7
But if the earlier time falls at the beginning of an accounting period which begins with the first day of a month, the index for the previous month is used for the purposes of subsection (6)(a).

Adjustments for changes in index: relevant hedging schemes
400A
1
This section applies where—
a
section 400 applies in relation to an amount to be brought into account for an accounting period of a company (“company A”) in respect of a security, and
b
conditions 1 to 3 are met.
2
Condition 1 is that company A is a party to a relevant hedging scheme at any time in the accounting period.
3
Condition 2 is that there is an increase in the
relevant
prices index between the times mentioned in subsection (1) of section 400.
4
Condition 3 is that the index-linked capital return on the security in the accounting period, or a proportion of it, is hedged.
5
Where this section applies, any increase in the carrying value of the security at the earlier of the times mentioned in subsection (1) of section 400 that would, apart from this section, be made under subsection (2) of that section is reduced—
a
in a case in which the index-linked capital return on the security in the accounting period is wholly hedged, to nil, and
b
in a case in which only a proportion of that return is hedged, by the same proportion.
6
For the purposes of this section “
a relevant hedging scheme
” means a scheme the purpose, or one of the main purposes, of any party to which, on entering into the scheme, is to secure that the index-linked capital return on the security, or a proportion of it, is hedged.
7
For the purposes of this section the “index-linked capital return” of the security is so much of the return on the security as—
a
would, disregarding section 400, result in an increase in the carrying value of the security between the times mentioned in subsection (1) of that section, and
b
is attributable to an increase in the
relevant
prices index.
8
For the purposes of this section the index-linked capital return on the security, or any proportion of that return, is “hedged” if (whether because of the operation of a swap or otherwise) the pre-tax economic profit or loss made by the relevant group or company in the accounting period is unaffected by it.
9
In subsection (8) “
the relevant group or company
” means—
a
company A and every other company that is at any time in the accounting period—
i
associated with company A, and
ii
a party to the relevant hedging scheme, or
b
if there is no such other company, company A.
10
In this section “
scheme
” includes any scheme, arrangements or understanding of any kind whatever, whether or not legally enforceable, involving a single transaction or two or more transactions.

Interpretation of section 400A: economic profits and losses
400B
1
A reference in section 400A to an “economic” profit or loss made by any person in a period is to a profit or loss made by that person in that period, computed taking into account unrealised (as well as realised) profits and losses.
2
For the purposes of section 400A an economic profit or loss is made by a group of companies if it is made by the members of the group considered together.
3
In determining for the purposes of section 400A the amount of an economic profit or loss made by a group of companies in any period, the economic profits and losses of each member of the group are to be computed over that period (whether or not that period is an accounting period of the member).
4
A reference in section 400A to a “pre-tax” economic profit or loss is a reference to an economic profit or loss determined disregarding any gain or loss made as a result of the operation of any provision of the Corporation Tax Acts.

Meaning of “associated with”
400C
1
For the purposes of section 400A, a company (“company B”) is associated with company A at a time (“
the relevant time
”) during an accounting period of company A (“the accounting period”) if any of the following five conditions is met.
2
The first condition is that the financial results of company A and company B, for a period that includes the relevant time, meet the consolidation condition.
3
The second condition is that there is a connection between company A and company B for the accounting period.
4
The third condition is that, at the relevant time, company A has a major interest in company B or company B has a major interest in company A.
5
The fourth condition is that—
a
the financial results of company A and a third company, for a period that includes the relevant time, meet the consolidation condition, and
b
at the relevant time the third company has a major interest in company B.
6
The fifth condition is that—
a
there is a connection between company A and a third company for the accounting period, and
b
at the relevant time the third company has a major interest in company B.
7
In this paragraph the financial results of any two companies for any period meet “the consolidation condition” if—
a
they are required to be comprised in group accounts prepared under section 399 of the Companies Act 2006 (duty of certain parent companies to prepare group accounts), or
b
they would be required to be comprised in such accounts but for the application of an exemption mentioned in subsection (3) of that section.
8
Section 466 (companies connected for an accounting period) applies for the purposes of this section.
9
In this section “
scheme
” includes any scheme, arrangements or understanding of any kind whatever, whether or not legally enforceable, involving a single transaction or two or more transactions.

Other gilt-edged securities

Gilt strips
401
1
This section applies if a loan relationship is represented by—
a
a strip of a gilt-edged security, or
b
any other gilt-edged security.
2
Subsections (3) and (4) apply if a person exchanges a gilt-edged security for strips of that security.
3
The security is treated as having been redeemed at the time of the exchange by the payment to that person of its market value.
4
The person is treated as having acquired each strip for an amount equal to—
A × B/C
where—
A is the market value of the security at the time of the exchange,
B is the market value of the strip at that time, and
C is the total of the market values at that time of all the strips received in the exchange.
5
Subsections (6) and (7) apply if strips of a gilt-edged security are consolidated into a single gilt-edged security by being exchanged by any person for that security.
6
Each strip is treated as having been redeemed at the time of the exchange by the payment to that person of the amount equal to its market value.
7
The person is treated as having acquired the security for the amount equal to the total of the market values of all the strips given in the exchange.
8
For the meaning of “market value” and “strip” in relation to securities, see section 402 and section 403 respectively.

Market value of securities
402
1
References in section 401 to the market value of a security given or received in exchange for another are references to its market value at the time of the exchange.
2
The Treasury may by regulations make provision for the purposes of section 401 and this section as to the way of determining the market value at any time of—
a
any strip, or
b
any other gilt-edged security.
3
The regulations may make—
a
different provision for different cases, and
b
incidental, supplemental, consequential and transitional provision and savings.

Meaning of “strip”
403
1
In sections 401 and 402 “strip”, in relation to a gilt-edged security, means a security issued under the National Loans Act 1968 (c. 13) which meets conditions A, B and C.
2
Condition A is that the security is issued for the purpose of representing the right to or of securing—
a
a payment corresponding to a payment of interest or principal remaining to be made under the gilt-edged security, or
b
two or more payments each corresponding to a payment to be so made.
3
Condition B is that the security is issued in conjunction with the issue of one or more other securities which, together with that security—
a
represent the right to, or
b
secure,
payments corresponding to every payment remaining to be made under the gilt-edged security.
4
Condition C is that the security is not itself a security that—
a
represents the right to, or
b
secures,
payments corresponding to a part of every payment remaining to be made under the gilt-edged security.
5
After the balance has been struck for a dividend on a gilt-edged security, a payment to be made in respect of that dividend is treated for the purposes of conditions A, B and C as not being a payment remaining to be made under that security.

Restriction on deductions etc relating to FOTRA securities
404
1
A company which meets conditions A and B is not to bring into account for the purposes of this Part—
a
any amount relating to changes in the value of a FOTRA security, or
b
any debit in respect of the loan relationship represented by the security, including any expenses related to holding the security or any transaction concerning it.
2
Condition A is that the company is the beneficial owner of the security.
3
Condition B is that the company is a company which would be exempt from corporation tax on the security under section 1279 (exemption of profits from FOTRA securities).
4
In this section “FOTRA security” has the same meaning as in that section (see section 1280(1)).

Certain non-UK residents with interest on 3½% War Loan 1952 Or After
405
1
This section applies if—
a
in any accounting period a non-UK resident company carries on a business in the United Kingdom—
i
consisting of banking or insurance, or
ii
consisting wholly or partly of dealing in securities, and
b
in calculating the profits of the business for the period any amount is disregarded as a result of section 1279 (exemption of profits from FOTRA securities) because of a condition subject to which any 3½% War Loan 1952 Or After was issued.
2
Interest on money borrowed for the purposes of the business is to be brought into account as a debit for the purposes of this Part for that period only so far as it exceeds the ineligible amount.
3
The ineligible amount is found as follows—
Step 1
Add together all sums borrowed for the purposes of the business and still owing in the accounting period.
Step 2
Deduct any sums carrying interest that is not brought into account as a debit under this Part (otherwise than because of subsection (2)).
Step 3
If the amount found at Step 2 exceeds the total cost of the 3½% War Loan 1952 Or After held for the purposes of the business in the accounting period, deduct the excess from that amount.
Step 4
Calculate the average rate of interest in the accounting period on money borrowed for the purposes of the business.
Step 5
Calculate the amount of interest payable on the amount found at Step 3 at the rate found at Step 4 for the accounting period.
The result is the ineligible amount.
4
If the company's holding of 3½% War Loan 1952 Or After has fluctuated during the accounting period, the total cost for the purposes of Step 3 is taken to be—
C × AH/TH
where—
C is the cost of acquisition of the initial holding (if any) and any holdings acquired during the accounting period,
AH is the average holding in that period, and
TH is the total of the initial holding (if any) and any holdings acquired during the accounting period.
5
In subsection (4) “initial holding” means the holding held by the company at the beginning of the accounting period.

Deeply discounted securities: connected companies and close companies

Introduction
406
1
The following sections deal with deeply discounted securities—
a. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
b
sections 409 to 411 (deeply discounted securities of close companies), and
c
section 412 (persons indirectly standing in the position of creditor).
2
In this section and sections 409 to 412 “deeply discounted security” has the same meaning as in Chapter 8 of Part 4 of ITTOIA 2005 (profits from deeply discounted securities) (see section 430 of that Act).
3
In sections 409 to 412 “the discount” means the difference between—
a
the issue price of the security, and
b
the amount payable on redemption.
4
The provisions of Chapter 8 of Part 4 of ITTOIA 2005 apply for the purposes of this section and sections 409 to 412 for determining the difference between the issue price of a security and the amount payable on redemption as they apply for the purposes of section 430 of that Act.

Postponement until redemption of debits for connected companies' deeply discounted securities
407. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Companies connected for section 407
408. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Postponement until redemption of debits for close companies' deeply discounted securities
409
1
This section applies for any accounting period (“the relevant period”) if—
a
a debtor relationship of a close company (“the issuing company”) is represented by a deeply discounted security it has issued,
b
at any time in the period there is a person ("C") who stands in the position of a creditor as respects the security and is—
i
a participator in the issuing company,
ii
an associate of such a participator,
iii
a company of which such a participator has control,
iv
a person who controls a company which is such a participator,
v
an associate of a person within sub-paragraph (iv), or
vi
a company controlled by a person within sub-paragraph (iv),
c
the period is not the accounting period in which the security is redeemed, and
d
this section is not disapplied by section 410
and, where it applies, the non-qualifying territory condition is met.
2
The debits which are to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part by the issuing company in respect of the loan relationship are to be adjusted so that debits relating to the amount of the discount that is referable to the relevant period (“relevant debits”)—
a
are not brought into account for the relevant period, but
b
are brought into account for the accounting period in which the security is redeemed.
3
If there is a person within subsection (1)(b) for only part of the relevant period, subsection (2) applies only to the appropriate proportion of the relevant debits.
4
In subsection (3) “the appropriate proportion” means the proportion that the part of the relevant period for which there is such a person bears to the whole of that period.
5
The amount of the discount that is referable to the relevant period is the amount of it which would be brought into account for the purposes of this Part for the relevant period in the case of the issuing company, apart from subsections (2) and (3).
6
For the meaning of other expressions used in this section, see—
a
section 411 (interpretation of this section), and
b
section 412 (persons indirectly standing in the position of creditor).

Exceptions to section 409
410
1
Section 409 does not apply for any accounting period (“the relevant period”) if any of the following conditions are met—
a
the corresponding creditor relationship conditions (see subsection (2)),
b
the CIS-based close company conditions (see subsection (3)), or
c
the CIS limited partnership conditions (see subsection (4)).
2
The corresponding creditor relationship conditions are that—
a
at all times in the relevant period when there is a person within section 409(1)(b), that person is a company, and
b
credits representing the full amount of the discount that is referable to the period are brought into account for the purposes of this Part for any accounting period in respect of the corresponding creditor relationship (see section 412(3)).
3
The CIS-based close company conditions are that—
a
the issuing company is a CIS-based close company,
b
at no time in the relevant period when there is a person within section 409(1)(b) is that person resident for tax purposes in a non-qualifying territory, and
c
the issuing company is a small or medium-sized enterprise for the relevant period.
4
The CIS limited partnership conditions are that—
a
the debt is one which is owed to, or to persons acting for, a CIS limited partnership,
b
no member of that partnership is resident for tax purposes in a non-qualifying territory at any time in the relevant period when there is a person within section 409(1)(b),
c
the issuing company has received written notice from the partnership containing information from which it appears that the condition in paragraph (b) is met, and
d
the issuing company is a small or medium-sized enterprise for the relevant period.
4A
The non-qualifying territory condition applies if C is a company; and the non-qualifying territory condition is that C is—
a
resident for tax purposes in a non-qualifying territory at any time in the relevant period, or
b
effectively managed in a non-taxing non-qualifying territory at any such time.
5
In this section—
- “CIS-based close company” means a company that would not be a close company apart from the rights and powers of one or more partners in a CIS limited partnership being attributed to another of the partners under section 451(4) to (6) of CTA 2010 because of section 448(1)(a) of that Act,
- “CIS limited partnership” means a limited partnership—
  1. which is a collective investment scheme, or
  2. which would be a collective investment scheme if it were not a body corporate,
- “issuing company” has the same meaning as in section 409 (see subsection (1)(a) of that section),
- “non-qualifying territory” has the meaning given by section 173 of TIOPA 2010 (provision not at arm's length),
- “
resident for tax purposes
” means liable, under the law of the non-qualifying territory, to tax there by reason of domicile, residence or place of management, and
- “small or medium-sized enterprise” has the meaning given by section 172 of TIOPA 2010.
5A
For the purposes of this section, a non-qualifying territory is “non-taxing” if companies are not under its law liable to tax by reason of domicile, residence or place of management.
6
For the meaning of “corresponding creditor relationship”, see section 412 (persons indirectly standing in the position of creditor).

Interpretation of section 409
411
1
Section 472 (meaning of “control”) applies for the purposes of section 409 and this section.
2
A person who is a participator in a company which controls another company is treated for the purposes of section 409 as being a participator in that other company also.
3
Subject to that, in section 409 and this section “participator”, in relation to a company, means a person who is a participator in the company within the meaning given by section 454 of CTA 2010, but not a person who is such a participator just because of being a loan creditor of the company.
4
In determining whether a person who carries on the trade of banking is a participator in a company for the purposes of section 409 and this section, securities of the company acquired by the person in the ordinary course of the person's business are ignored.

Persons indirectly standing in the position of creditor
412
1
For the purposes of sections 407(1)(b) and 409 a person is treated as standing in the position of a creditor if the person indirectly stands in that position by reference to a series of loan relationships or relevant money debts.
2
If a company (“C”) is so treated for the purposes of section 407(1)(b), the reference in section 407(1)(e) to the corresponding creditor relationship is a reference to C's creditor relationship.
3
If a person (“P”) is so treated for the purposes of section 409, the reference in section 410(2)(b) to the corresponding creditor relationship is a reference to P's creditor relationship.
4
In subsection (1) “relevant money debt” means a money debt which would be a loan relationship if a company directly stood in the position of creditor or debtor.

Funding bonds

Issue of funding bonds
413
1
This section applies to the issue of funding bonds to a creditor in respect of a liability to pay interest on a debt incurred by a body corporate, a government, a public institution or other public authority.
2
The issue is treated for the purposes of the Corporation Tax Acts as if it were the payment of so much of that interest as equals the market value of the bonds at their issue.
3
In this section “funding bonds” includes any bonds, stocks, shares, securities or certificates of indebtedness (but does not include any instrument providing for payment in the form of goods or services or a voucher) .

Redemption of funding bonds
414
1
The redemption of funding bonds is not treated as the payment of interest on a debt for the purposes of the Corporation Tax Acts if their issue was treated as the payment of interest on the debt under—
a
section 413, or
b
section 380 of ITTOIA 2005 (which makes provision corresponding to section 413 for income tax purposes).
2
In this section “funding bonds” includes any bonds, stocks, shares, securities or certificates of indebtedness.

Derivatives

Loan relationships with embedded derivatives
415
1
This section applies if in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice a company treats the rights and liabilities under a loan relationship to which it is a party as divided between—
a
rights and liabilities under a loan relationship (“the host contract”), and
b
rights and liabilities under one or more derivative financial instruments or equity instruments.
2
The company is treated for the purposes of this Part as a party to a loan relationship whose rights and liabilities consist only of those of the host contract.
3
For the corresponding treatment of the rights and liabilities within subsection (1)(b), see section 585 (loan relationships with embedded derivatives).

Election for application of sections 415 and 585
416
1
This section applies if—
a
a company is subject to old UK GAAP for a period of account,
b
at the beginning of its first relevant period of account the company did not hold any assets (“relevant assets”) which it is not permitted under old UK GAAP to treat as mentioned in section 415(1),
c
the company subsequently acquires one or more relevant assets (to which sections 415 and 585 do not apply because of the company being subject to old UK GAAP), and
d
the company would have been permitted to treat the relevant assets as mentioned in section 415(1) if it had been subject to—
i
international accounting standards, or
ii
new UK GAAP.
2
The company may elect that this Part and Part 7 (derivative contracts) should apply as if sections 415 and 585 did apply.
3
The election has effect in relation to all relevant assets held by the company including those subsequently acquired, except as provided in subsection (4).
4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
If an election is made under this section, sections 315 to 318 (adjustments on change of accounting policy) apply as if there were a change of accounting policy consisting of the company treating its relevant assets as mentioned in section 415(1) as from the date the election has effect.
6
See also section 613(4) (which makes provision corresponding to subsection (5) for the purposes of Part 7).
7
In this section—
- “first relevant period of account”, in relation to a company, means the first period of account of the company beginning on or after 1 January 2005 (the first period in relation to which section 94A of FA 1996 (which is rewritten in section 415) had effect),
- “old UK GAAP” means UK generally accepted accounting practice as it applied for periods of account beginning before 1 January 2005, and
- “new UK GAAP” means UK generally accepted accounting practice as it applies for periods of account beginning on or after that date.
8
Section 417 makes further provision about elections under this section.

Further provisions about elections under section 416
417
1
An election under section 416 must be made not later than 90 days after the acquisition of the relevant assets or, if there is more than one acquisition, the first of them.
2
The election is irrevocable.
3
The election has effect from the beginning of the period of account in which the first relevant asset is acquired.
4
In this section “relevant assets” has the same meaning as in section 416.

Loan relationships involving connected debtor and creditor where debits exceed credits
418
1
This section applies if—
a
two connected companies are party to a loan relationship, one (“
the debtor
”) as debtor and the other (“
the creditor
”) as creditor, and
b
conditions
A and B
are met.
2
Condition A is that the rights under the loan relationship include provision by virtue of which the creditor company
or any company connected with it
—
a
is or may become entitled, or
b
is or may be required,
to acquire (whether by conversion or exchange or otherwise) any shares in any company.
3
Condition B is that—
a
the debits brought into account by the debtor under this Part in respect of the loan relationship for any accounting period, exceed
b
the credits brought into account (otherwise than as a result of this section) by the creditor in respect of the loan relationship for the corresponding accounting period or periods of the creditor.
5
The creditor is treated for the purposes of this Part as bringing into account for the corresponding accounting period or periods additional credits in respect of the loan relationship of an amount equal to the excess.
6
But if the creditor is a party to the loan relationship as creditor during only part of the corresponding accounting period (or any of the corresponding periods), it is treated for the purposes of this Part as bringing into account for the period only such part of the excess as is just and reasonable.
6A
For the purposes of this section the creditor is to be treated as continuing to be a party to the loan relationship even though the creditor has disposed of the creditor's rights under the loan relationship to another person—
a
under a repo or stock lending arrangement, or
b
under a transaction which is treated as not involving any disposal as a result of section 26 of
TCGA
1992 (mortgages and charges not to be treated as disposals).
6B
For the purposes of this section the creditor is to be treated as continuing to be a party to the loan relationship even though the creditor has disposed of the creditor's rights under the loan relationship to another person if the disposal was made with the relevant avoidance intention.
6C
The relevant avoidance intention is the intention of eliminating or reducing the credits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part.
7
Sections 418A and 419 supplement
this section.

Cases involving host contract
418A
1
This section applies where the debtor or the creditor, in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice, treats the rights and liabilities under the loan relationship as divided between—
a
rights and liabilities under a loan relationship (“the host contract”), and
b
rights and liabilities under one or more derivative financial instruments or equity instruments.
2
Where the debtor, in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice, treats the rights and liabilities under the loan relationship as so divided, section 418 has effect as if the reference to the loan relationship in subsection (3)(a) were to the host contract.
3
Where the creditor, in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice, treats the rights and liabilities under the loan relationship as so divided, section 418 has effect as if the reference to the loan relationship in subsection (3)(b) were to the host contract.
4
In this section “
the debtor
” and “
the creditor
” have the same meaning as in section 418.

Section 418: supplementary
419
1
References in section 418 to a company being a party to a loan relationship as debtor or creditor include a company which indirectly stands in the position of a debtor or creditor as respects the loan relationship by reference to a series of loan relationships or relevant money debts.
2
In subsection (1) “
relevant money debt
” means a money debt that would be a loan relationship if a company directly stood in the position of debtor or creditor.
3
For the purposes of section 418 an accounting period of the creditor corresponds with an accounting period of the debtor if—
a
it coincides with it, or
b
it is wholly or partly within it.
4
If a corresponding accounting period of the creditor does not coincide with that of the debtor, such apportionments as are just and reasonable are to be made for the purposes of section 418.
5
Two companies are connected for the purposes of section 418 if their accounting results are reflected in the consolidated group accounts of a group of companies.
6
Subsection (5) does not affect the application of
section 1122 of CTA 2010
(how to tell whether persons are connected).
6A
References in section 418 to a company bringing debits or credits into account under or for the purposes of this Part include bringing debits or credits into account under or for the purposes of this Part in determining the chargeable profits of the company (or in determining that there were no such profits) for the purposes of Chapter 4 of Part 17 of
ICTA
(controlled foreign companies).
7
In this section “
the debtor
” and “
the creditor
” have the same meaning as in section 418.

Options etc

Assumptions where options etc apply
420
1
This section applies if—
a
the answer to any question specified in subsection (2)—
i
depends on the exercise of an option by a party to a loan relationship (“A”) or A's associate, or
ii
is otherwise under the control of A or A's associate, and
b
an amortised cost basis of accounting applies for an accounting period.
2
The questions are—
a
whether any amount will become due under the relationship after the period ends,
b
how much will become due under it after the period ends, and
c
when after the end of the period an amount will become due under the relationship.
3
In determining the credits and debits to be brought into account for the accounting period in accordance with an amortised cost basis, the assumption in subsection (4) is to be made.
4
The assumption is that A or A's associate will exercise the power to determine whether and on what date any amount will become due in the way which appears to be the most advantageous to A.
5
That way is to be determined—
a
as at the end of the accounting period, and
b
ignoring taxation.

Hybrid capital instruments

Amounts payable in respect of hybrid capital instruments
420A
1
This section applies if a loan relationship is a hybrid capital instrument for an accounting period of the debtor.
2
The Corporation Tax Acts have effect in relation to any person in respect of times in the accounting period as if any qualifying amount payable in respect of the hybrid capital instrument were not a distribution.
3
An amount is a “qualifying amount” so far as it would not be regarded as a distribution if it is assumed that any provision made by the loan relationship under which the debtor is entitled to defer or cancel a payment of interest under the loan relationship had not been made.
4
This section also needs to be read together with section 1015(1A) of CTA 2010 (which prevents hybrid capital instruments from being “special securities” as a result of being equity notes).
Chapter 13

European cross-border transfers of business

Introduction

Introduction to Chapter
421
1
This Chapter applies if—
a
condition A or B is met, and
b
each of the companies mentioned in subsection (3)(a) or (4)(a) makes a claim under this section,
but see section 426 (tax avoidance etc) and section 429 (disapplication of Chapter where transparent entities involved).
2
Sections 424 and 425 (reorganisations involving loan relationships) also apply if, in addition to the conditions in section 424(1)(a) and (b), condition C is met in relation to the transfer in the course of which the reorganisation in question occurs.
3
Condition A is that—
a
a company resident in one relevant state transfers to a company resident in another relevant state the whole or part of a business carried on in the United Kingdom,
b
the transfer is wholly in exchange for shares or debentures issued by the transferee to the transferor, and
c
immediately after the transfer the transferee is within the charge to corporation tax.
4
Condition B is that—
a
a company transfers part of its business to one or more companies,
b
the transferor is resident in one relevant state,
c
the part of the transferor's business which is transferred is carried on by the transferor in the United Kingdom,
d
at least one transferee is resident in a relevant state other than that in which the transferor is resident (and each transferee is resident in a relevant state, but not necessarily the same one),
e
the transferor continues to carry on a business after the transfer,
f
immediately after the transfer each transferee is within the charge to corporation tax, and
g
the transfer—
i
is made in exchange for the issue of shares in or debentures of each transferee to each person holding shares in or debentures of the transferor, or
ii
is not so made only because, and only so far as, a transferee is prevented from so issuing such shares or debentures by section 658 of the Companies Act 2006 (c. 46) (general rule against limited company acquiring own shares) or by a corresponding provision of the law of another relevant state preventing such an issue.
5
Condition C is that—
a
a UK resident company transfers part of its business to one or more companies,
b
the part of the transferor's business which is transferred to the transferees was carried on immediately before the transfer in a member State ... through a permanent establishment, and
c
the conditions in subsection (4)(d), (e) and (g) are met.
6
In this Chapter—
- “relevant state” means the United Kingdom or a member State;
- “the transfer of business” means the transfer of business mentioned in subsection (3)(a), (4)(a) or (5)(a),
- “transferee” has the same meaning as in subsection (3), (4) or (5), and
- “the transferor” has the same meaning as in subsection (3), (4) or (5).
7
For the meaning of “company” and “resident in a relevant state”, see section 430.

Transfers of loan relationships at notional carrying value

Transfer of loan relationship at notional carrying value
422
1
This section applies if in the course of the transfer of business the transferor transfers an asset or liability representing a loan relationship to a transferee.
2
For the purpose of determining the credits and debits to be brought into account in respect of the loan relationship for the purposes of this Part, the transferor and the transferee are treated as having entered into the transfer of that asset or liability for consideration of an amount equal to the notional carrying value of the asset or liability.
3
For the purposes of this section—
a. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
b
“notional carrying value”, in relation to an asset or liability, means the amount which would have been its tax-adjusted carrying value based on the accounts of the transferor if a period of account had ended immediately before the date when the transferor ceased to be a party to the loan relationship.
4
This section is subject to section 423 (transferor using fair value accounting).

Transferor using fair value accounting
423
1
This section applies instead of section 422 if, in a case where that section would otherwise apply, the transferor is regarded for the purposes of this section as using fair value accounting in respect of the loan relationship (see subsection (4)).
2
The amount which is to be brought into account by the transferor in respect of the transfer of the asset or liability mentioned in section 422(1) (“the transferor's amount”) is—
a
if an asset is to be brought into account, its fair value as at the date when the transferee becomes a party to the loan relationship, or the fair value of the rights under or interest in it as at that date, and
b
if a liability is to be brought into account, its fair value as at that date.
3
For any accounting period in which the transferee is a party to the loan relationship, for the purpose of determining the credits and debits to be brought into account in respect of it for the purposes of this Part, the transferee is treated as if it had acquired the asset or liability representing the relationship for consideration of an amount equal to the transferor's amount.
4
The transferor is regarded for the purposes of this section as using fair value accounting in respect of the loan relationship only if the credits and debits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part as respects the relationship are determined on that basis.
5
It does not matter for the purposes of subsection (4) if the transferor does not otherwise use fair value accounting in respect of the loan relationship.

Reorganisations involving loan relationships
424
1
This section applies if—
a
sections 127 to 130 of TCGA 1992 (reorganisations: equation of original shares and new holding)—
i
apply in relation to a reorganisation, or
ii
would so apply but for section 116(5) of that Act (which disapplies those sections where the original shares or the new holding consists of or includes a qualifying corporate bond),
b
the original shares consist of or include an asset representing a loan relationship, and
c
either—
i
section 422 or 423 applies as a result of condition B in section 421 being met in relation to the transfer in the course of which the reorganisation occurs, or
ii
condition C in section 421 is met in relation to that transfer.
2
For the purposes of this Part such debits and credits are to be brought into account as would be brought into account if the reorganisation were a disposal of the asset representing the loan relationship for consideration of an amount equal to its notional carrying value.
3
For the purposes of this section, the notional carrying value of that asset is the amount which would have been its tax-adjusted carrying value based on the accounts of the original holder if a period of account had ended immediately before the date when the reorganisation occurred.
4
In this section—
...
- “original holder” means a person holding the original shares immediately before the reorganisation,
- “original shares” has the meaning given by section 126(1) of TCGA 1992 (application of sections 126 to 131 of that Act), and
- “reorganisation” includes anything to which sections 127 to 130 of that Act apply as if it were a reorganisation.
5
This section is subject to—
a
section 425 (original holder using fair value accounting), and
b
section 429 (disapplication of Chapter where transparent entities involved).

Original holder using fair value accounting
425
1
This section applies instead of section 424 if, in a case where that section would otherwise apply, the original holder is regarded for the purposes of this section as using fair value accounting in respect of the loan relationship constituting or included in the original shares.
2
The amount which is to be brought into account by the original holder in respect of the reorganisation (“the disposal amount”) is the fair value of the asset representing the loan relationship as at the date when the reorganisation occurred, or of the rights under or interest in that relationship as at that date.
3
For any accounting period in which a successor creditor company is a party to the loan relationship, for the purpose of determining the credits and debits to be brought into account in respect of the relationship for the purposes of this Part, the successor creditor company is treated as if it had acquired the asset representing the loan relationship for consideration of an amount equal to the disposal amount.
4
Subsections (4) and (5) of section 423 apply for the purposes of this section as they apply for the purposes of that section, but taking the references in that section to the transferor as references to the original holder.
5
In this section—
- “successor creditor company” means a company in relation to which the loan relationship constituting or included in the original shares is a creditor relationship immediately after the reorganisation, and
- “original holder” and “original shares” have the same meaning as in section 424.
6
This section is subject to section 429 (disapplication of Chapter where transparent entities involved).

Exception for tax avoidance cases

Tax avoidance etc
426
1
This Chapter does not apply in relation to the transfer of business if—
a
the transfer of business is not effected for genuine commercial reasons, or
b
the transfer of business forms part of a scheme or arrangements of which the main purpose, or one of the main purposes, is avoiding liability to corporation tax, capital gains tax or income tax.
2
But subsection (1) does not prevent this Chapter from applying if before the transfer of business—
a
the companies mentioned in section 421(3)(a), (4)(a) or (5)(a) have applied to the Commissioners for Her Majesty's Revenue and Customs, and
b
the Commissioners have notified them that they are satisfied that subsection will not have that effect.

Procedure on application for clearance
427
1
This section applies in relation to an application under section 426(2).
2
The application must be in writing and must contain particulars of the operations which are to be effected.
3
The Commissioners for Her Majesty's Revenue and Customs may by notice require the applicant to provide further particulars for the purpose of enabling them to make their decision.
4
Such a notice may only be given within 30 days of the receipt of the application or of any further particulars previously required under subsection (3).
5
If such a notice is not complied with within 30 days or such longer period as the Commissioners for Her Majesty's Revenue and Customs may allow, they need not proceed further on the application.

Decision on application for clearance
428
1
The Commissioners for Her Majesty's Revenue and Customs must notify their decision on an application under section 426(2) to the applicant—
a
within 30 days of receiving the application, or
b
if they give a notice under section 427(3), within 30 days of the notice being complied with.
2
If the Commissioners for Her Majesty's Revenue and Customs—
a
notify the applicant that they are not satisfied as mentioned in section 426(2)(b), or
b
do not notify their decision to the applicant within the time required by subsection (1),
the applicant may within 30 days of the notification or of that time require them to transmit the application to the tribunal, together with any notice given and further particulars provided under section 427(3).
3
In that case any notification by the tribunal has effect for the purposes of section 426(2)(b) as if it were a notification by the Commissioners for Her Majesty's Revenue and Customs.
4
If any particulars provided under section 427 do not fully and accurately disclose all facts and considerations material for the decision—
a
of the Commissioners for Her Majesty's Revenue and Customs, or
b
of the tribunal,
any resulting notification by the Commissioners for Her Majesty's Revenue and Customs or the tribunal is void.

Transparent entities

Disapplication of Chapter where transparent entities involved
429
1
This Chapter does not apply in relation to the transfer of business if the transferor is a transparent entity.
2
If any transferee is a transparent entity, sections 424 and 425 (reorganisations involving loan relationships) do not apply.
3
In this section “transparent entity” means a company which is resident in a member State ... and does not have an ordinary share capital.
4
For the meaning of “resident in a relevant state”, see section 430.

Interpretation

Interpretation
430
1
In this Chapter “company” means any entity listed as a company in Part A of Annex I to the Mergers Directive.
2
For the purposes of this Chapter, a company is resident in a relevant state if—
a
it is within a charge to tax under the law of the relevant state as being resident for that purpose, and
b
it is not regarded, for the purpose of any double taxation relief arrangements to which the relevant state is a party, as resident in a territory not within a relevant state.
Chapter 14

European cross-border mergers

Introduction

Introduction to Chapter
431
1
This Chapter applies if the following conditions are met—
a
conditions A to D,
b
in the case of a merger within subsection (3)(a), (b) or (c), condition E, and
c
in the case of a merger within subsection (3)(c) or (d), condition F,
but see section 437 (tax avoidance etc) and section 438 (disapplication of Chapter where transparent entities involved).
2
Sections 435 and 436 (reorganisations involving loan relationships) also apply in cases that would be within subsection (1) apart from condition D not being met if, in addition to the conditions in section 435(1)(a) and (b), condition G is met in relation to a transfer in the course of the merger in which the reorganisation in question occurs.
3
Condition A is that—
a
an SE is formed by the merger of two or more companies in accordance with Articles 2(1) and 17(2)(a) or (b) of Council Regulation (EC) No. 2157/2001 on the Statute for a European company (Societas Europaea),
b
an SCE is formed by the merger of two or more co-operative societies, at least one of which is a society registered under the the Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies Act 2014, in accordance with Articles 2(1) and 19 of Council Regulation (EC) No. 1435/2003 on the Statute for a European Co-operative Society (SCE),
c
a merger is effected by the transfer by one or more companies of all their assets and liabilities to a single existing company, or
d
a merger is effected by the transfer by two or more companies of all their assets and liabilities to a single new company (other than an SE or an SCE) in exchange for the issue by the transferee, to each person holding shares in or debentures of a transferor, of shares or debentures.
4
Condition B is that each merging company is resident in a relevant state.
5
Condition C is that the merging companies are not all resident in the same relevant state.
6
Condition D is that immediately after the merger the transferee is within the charge to corporation tax.
7
Condition E is that—
a
the transfer of assets and liabilities to the transferee in the course of the merger is made in exchange for the issue of shares or debentures by the transferee to each person holding shares in or debentures of a transferor, or
b
that transfer is not so made only because, and only so far as, the transferee is prevented from so issuing such shares or debentures by section 658 of the Companies Act 2006 (c. 46) (general rule against limited company acquiring own shares) or by a corresponding provision of the law of a member State preventing such an issue.
8
Condition F is that in the course of the merger each transferor ceases to exist without being in liquidation (within the meaning given by section 247 of the Insolvency Act 1986 (c. 45)).
9
Condition G is that—
a
in the course of the merger a company resident in the United Kingdom (“company A”) transfers to a company resident in a member State all assets and liabilities relating to a business which company A carried on in a member State ... through a permanent establishment, and
b
that transfer includes the transfer of an asset or liability representing a loan relationship.
10
In this Chapter,
a
“the merger” and “the merging companies” have the same meaning as in this section
b
“relevant state” means the United Kingdom or a member State.
11
See—
a
section 432 for the meaning of “the transferee” and “transferor”, and
b
section 439 for the meaning of “company”, “co-operative society” and “resident in a relevant state”.

Meaning of “the transferee” and “transferor”
432
1
In this Chapter, “the transferee” means—
a
in relation to a merger within section 431(3)(a), the SE,
b
in relation to a merger within section 431(3)(b), the SCE, and
c
in relation to a merger within section 431(3)(c) or (d), the company to which assets and liabilities are transferred.
2
In this Chapter “transferor” means—
a
in relation to a merger within section 431(3)(a), a company merging to form the SE,
b
in relation to a merger within section 431(3)(b), a co-operative society merging to form the SCE, and
c
in relation to a merger within section 431(3)(c) or (d), a company transferring all its assets and liabilities.

Transfers of loan relationships at notional carrying value

Transfer of loan relationship at notional carrying value
433
1
This section applies if in the course of the merger a transferor transfers an asset or liability representing a loan relationship to the transferee.
2
For the purpose of determining the credits and debits to be brought into account in respect of the loan relationship in accordance with this Part, the transferor and the transferee are treated as having entered into the transfer of that asset or liability for consideration of an amount equal to the notional carrying value of the asset or liability.
3
For the purposes of this section—
a. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
b
“notional carrying value”, in relation to an asset or liability, means the amount which would have been its tax-adjusted carrying value based on the accounts of the transferor if a period of account had ended immediately before the date when the transferor ceased to be a party to the loan relationship.
4
This section is subject to section 434.

Transferor using fair value accounting
434
1
This section applies instead of section 433 if, in a case where that section would otherwise apply, the transferor is regarded for the purposes of this section as using fair value accounting in respect of the loan relationship (see subsection (4)).
2
The amount which is to be brought into account by the transferor in respect of the transfer of the asset or liability mentioned in section 433(1) (“the transferor's amount”) is—
a
if an asset is to be brought into account, its fair value as at the date when the transferee becomes a party to the loan relationship, or the fair value of the rights under or interest in it as at that date, and
b
if a liability is to be brought into account, its fair value as at that date.
3
For any accounting period in which the transferee is a party to the loan relationship, for the purpose of determining the credits and debits to be brought into account in respect of it for the purposes of this Part, the transferee is treated as if it had acquired the asset or liability representing the relationship for consideration of an amount equal to the transferor's amount.
4
The transferor is regarded for the purposes of this section as using fair value accounting in respect of the loan relationship only if the credits and debits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part as respects the relationship are determined on that basis.
5
It does not matter for the purposes of subsection (4) if the transferor does not otherwise use fair value accounting in respect of the loan relationship.

Reorganisations involving loan relationships
435
1
This section applies if—
a
sections 127 to 130 of TCGA 1992 (reorganisations: equation of original shares and new holding)—
i
apply in relation to a reorganisation, or
ii
would so apply but for section 116(5) of that Act (which disapplies those sections where the original shares or the new holding consists of or includes a qualifying corporate bond),
b
the original shares consist of or include an asset representing a loan relationship, and
c
section 433 or 434 applies in relation to a transfer in the course of the merger in which the reorganisation occurs or, in a case where those sections would apply apart from condition D in section 431 not being met, condition G in that section is met in relation to such a transfer.
2
For the purposes of this Part such debits and credits are to be brought into account as would be brought into account if the reorganisation were a disposal of the asset representing the loan relationship for consideration of an amount equal to its notional carrying value.
3
For the purposes of this section, the notional carrying value of that asset is the amount which would have been its tax-adjusted carrying value based on the accounts of the original holder if a period of account had ended immediately before the date when the reorganisation occurred.
4
In this section—
...
- “original holder” means a person holding the original shares immediately before the reorganisation,
- “original shares” has the meaning given by section 126(1) of TCGA 1992 (application of sections 126 to 131 of that Act), and
- “reorganisation” includes anything to which sections 127 to 130 of that Act apply as if it were a reorganisation.
5
This section is subject to—
a
section 436 (original holder using fair value accounting), and
b
section 438 (disapplication of Chapter where transparent entities involved).

Original holder using fair value accounting
436
1
This section applies instead of section 435 if, in a case where that section would otherwise apply, the original holder is regarded for the purposes of this section as using fair value accounting in respect of the loan relationship constituting or included in the original shares.
2
The amount which is to be brought into account by the original holder in respect of the reorganisation (“the disposal amount”) is the fair value of the asset representing the loan relationship as at the date when the reorganisation occurred, or of the rights under or interest in that relationship as at that date.
3
For any accounting period in which a successor creditor company is a party to the loan relationship, for the purpose of determining the credits and debits to be brought into account in respect of the relationship for the purposes of this Part, the successor creditor company is treated as if it had acquired the asset representing the loan relationship for consideration of an amount equal to the disposal amount.
4
Subsections (4) and (5) of section 434 apply for the purposes of this section as they apply for the purposes of that section, but taking the references in that section to the transferor as references to the original holder.
5
In this section—
- “successor creditor company” means a company in relation to which the loan relationship constituting or included in the original shares is a creditor relationship immediately after the reorganisation, and
- “original holder” and “original shares” have the same meaning as in section 435.
6
This section is subject to section 438 (disapplication of Chapter where transparent entities involved).

Exception for tax avoidance cases

Tax avoidance etc
437
1
This Chapter does not apply in relation to the merger if—
a
the merger is not effected for genuine commercial reasons, or
b
the merger forms part of a scheme or arrangements of which the main purpose, or one of the main purposes, is avoiding liability to corporation tax, capital gains tax or income tax.
2
But subsection (1) does not prevent this Chapter from applying if before the merger—
a
any of the merging companies has applied to the Commissioners for Her Majesty's Revenue and Customs, and
b
the Commissioners have notified the merging companies that they are satisfied that subsection will not have that effect.
3
Sections 427 and 428 have effect in relation to subsection (2) as in relation to section 426(2), taking the references in section 428 to section 426(2)(b) as references to subsection (2)(b) of this section.

Transparent entities

Disapplication of Chapter where transparent entities involved
438
1
This section applies if one or more of the merging companies is a transparent entity.
2
If as a result of the merger the assets and liabilities of a transparent entity are transferred to another company, this Chapter does not apply in relation to the transfer.
3
If as a result of the merger the assets and liabilities of one or more other companies are transferred to a transparent entity, sections 435 and 436 do not apply to the new holding.
4
In this section—
- “new holding” has the meaning given by section 126(1) of TCGA 1992 (application of sections 126 to 131 of that Act), and
- “transparent entity” means a company which is resident in a member State ... and does not have an ordinary share capital.

Interpretation

Interpretation
439
1
In this Chapter—
- “company” means any entity listed as a company in Part A of Annex I to the Mergers Directive, and
- “co-operative society” means a society registered under the Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies Act 2014 or a similar society governed by the law of a member State ....
2
For the purposes of this Chapter, a company is resident in a relevant state if—
a
it is within a charge to tax under the law of the relevant state as being resident for that purpose, and
b
it is not regarded, for the purpose of any double taxation relief arrangements to which the relevant state is a party, as resident in a territory not within a relevant state.
Chapter 15

Tax avoidance

Introduction

Overview of Chapter
440
1
This Chapter contains rules connected with tax avoidance.
2
In particular—
a
for rules about unallowable purposes ..., see sections 441 and 442,
b
for rules relating to credits and debits where transactions are not at arm's length (other than credits and debits relating to exchange gains and losses), see sections 444 to 446,
c
for rules relating to credits and debits relating to exchange gains and losses where transactions are not at arm's length, see sections 447 to 452,
d
for rules about connected parties deriving benefit from creditor relationships, see section 453,
e
for rules dealing with tax advantages from resetting interest rates, see section 454, ...
f. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
g
for rules about debits arising as a result of the derecognition of creditor relationships, see section 455A,
and
h
for rules dealing with tax avoidance arrangements, see sections 455B to 455D.

Unallowable purposes and tax relief schemes

Loan relationships for unallowable purposes
441
1
This section applies if in any accounting period a loan relationship of a company has an unallowable purpose.
2
The company may not bring into account for that period for the purposes of this Part so much of any credit in respect of exchange gains from that relationship as on a just and reasonable apportionment is attributable to the unallowable purpose.
3
The company may not bring into account for that period for the purposes of this Part so much of any debit in respect of that relationship as on a just and reasonable apportionment is attributable to the unallowable purpose.
3A
If—
a
a credit brought into account for that period for the purposes of this Part by the company would (in the absence of this section) be reduced, and
b
the reduction represents an amount which, if it did not reduce a credit, would be brought into account as a debit in respect of that relationship,
subsection (3) applies to the amount of the reduction as if it were an amount that would (in the absence of this section) be brought into account as a debit.
4
An amount which would be brought into account for the purposes of this Part as respects any matter apart from this section is treated for the purposes of section 464(1) (amounts brought into account under this Part excluded from being otherwise brought into account) as if it were so brought into account.
5
Accordingly, that amount is not to be brought into account for corporation tax purposes as respects that matter either under this Part or otherwise.
6
For the meaning of “has an unallowable purpose” and “the unallowable purpose” in this section, see section 442.

Meaning of “unallowable purpose”
442
1
For the purposes of section 441 a loan relationship of a company has an unallowable purpose in an accounting period if, at times during that period, the purposes for which the company—
a
is a party to the relationship, or
b
enters into transactions which are related transactions by reference to it,
include a purpose (“the unallowable purpose”) which is not amongst the business or other commercial purposes of the company.
1A
In subsection (1)(b) “
related transaction
”, in relation to a loan relationship, includes anything which equates in substance to a disposal or acquisition of the kind mentioned in section 304(1) (as read with section 304(2)).
2
If a company is not within the charge to corporation tax in respect of a part of its activities, for the purposes of this section the business and other commercial purposes of the company do not include the purposes of that part.
3
Subsection (4) applies if a tax avoidance purpose is one of the purposes for which a company—
a
is a party to a loan relationship at any time, or
b
enters into a transaction which is a related transaction by reference to a loan relationship of the company.
4
For the purposes of subsection (1) the tax avoidance purpose is only regarded as a business or other commercial purpose of the company if it is not—
a
the main purpose for which the company is a party to the loan relationship or, as the case may be, enters into the related transaction, or
b
one of the main purposes for which it is or does so.
5
The references in subsections (3) and (4) to a tax avoidance purpose are references to any purpose which consists of securing a tax advantage for the company or any other person.

Restriction of relief for interest where tax relief schemes involved
443. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transactions not at arm's length: general

Transactions not at arm's length: general
444
1
If—
a
credits or debits in respect of a loan relationship of a company are to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of a related transaction, and
b
that transaction is not a transaction at arm's length,
those credits or debits are to be determined for the purposes of this Part in accordance with the independent terms assumption.
2
The independent terms assumption is that the transaction was entered into on the terms on which it would have been entered into between knowledgeable and willing parties dealing at arm's length.
3
This section is subject to section 445 (disapplication of this section where Part 4 of TIOPA 2010 applies).
4
Subsection (1) does not apply to debits arising from the acquisition of rights under a loan relationship if those rights are acquired for less than market value.
5
In a case where the related transaction is a transaction within section 336(2) or part of a series of transactions within 336(3) (group transactions), subsection (1) does not apply if—
a
section 340 (group transfers and transfers of insurance business: transfer at notional carrying value) applies as a result of that transaction or, as the case may be, that series of transactions, or
b
section 340 would so apply apart from section 341 (transferor using fair value accounting).
6
Subsection (1) does not apply to exchange gains or losses (but see sections 447 to 452).

Disapplication of section 444 where Part 4 of TIOPA 2010 applies
445
1
Section 444 does not apply, and Part 4 of TIOPA 2010 (provision not at arm's length) applies instead, to credits or debits in respect of amounts which—
a
fall to be adjusted for tax purposes under that Part, or
b
are within that Part without falling to be so adjusted (see subsection (3)).
2
Subsection (1) applies despite section 464 (amounts brought into account under this Part excluded from being otherwise brought into account), but is subject to—
a
section 340(7) (disapplication of Part 4 of TIOPA 2010 where group member replaces another as party to loan), and
b
section 447(5) (disapplication of that Part for exchange gains and losses).
3
For the purposes of subsection (1), an amount is within Part 4 of TIOPA 2010 without falling to be adjusted under it in a case where—
a
the condition in section 147(1)(a) of TIOPA 2010 is met,
aa
the participation condition is met (see subsection (3A)), and
b
the actual provision does not differ from the arm's length provision.
3A
Section 148 of TIOPA 2010 (when the participation condition is met) applies for the purposes of subsection (3)(aa) as it applies for the purposes of section 147(1)(b) of TIOPA 2010.
4
For the way in which this Part applies where adjustments are made under Part 4 of TIOPA 2010, see section 446.
5
In this section “the actual provision” and “the arm's length provision” have the same meaning as in Part 4 of TIOPA 2010 (see sections 149 and 151 of that Act).

Bringing into account adjustments made under Part 4 of TIOPA 2010
446
1
This section deals with the credits and debits which are to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part as a result of Part 4 of TIOPA 2010 (provision not at arm's length) applying in relation to a company's loan relationships or related transactions.
2
Subsection (3) applies if under Part 4 of TIOPA 2010 an amount (“the imputed amount”) is treated as an amount of profits or losses arising to a company from any of its loan relationships or related transactions.
3
Credits or debits relating to the imputed amount are to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part to the same extent as they would be in the case of an actual amount of such profits or losses.
4
Subsection (5) applies if under Part 4 of TIOPA 2010 an amount is treated as interest payable under any of a company's loan relationships.
5
Credits or debits relating to that amount are to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part to the same extent as they would be in the case of an actual amount of such interest.
6
Subsection (7) applies if under Part 4 of TIOPA 2010 an amount is treated as expenses incurred by a company under or for the purposes of any of its loan relationships or related transactions.
7
Debits relating to the amount are to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part to the same extent as they would be in the case of an actual amount of such expenses.
8
No credit is to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part to the extent that it corresponds to an amount which, as a result of the preceding provisions of this section, has not previously been brought into account as a debit.

Non-market loans

Non-market loans
446A
1
This section applies as respects any accounting period if—
a
a company has a debtor relationship in the period,
b
the amount recognised in the company's accounts in respect of the debt at the time the company became party to the debtor relationship was less than the transaction price,
c
credits in respect of the whole or part of the discount were not brought into account for the purposes of this Part, and
d
in a case where the creditor is a company, the non-qualifying territory condition is met.
2
The debits which are to be brought into account for the accounting period for the purposes of this Part by the debtor company in respect of the loan relationship are not to include debits relating to the relevant discount amount, to the extent that that amount is referable to the accounting period.
3
In this section “
relevant discount amount
” means—
a
in a case where credits in respect of the whole of the discount were not brought into account for the purposes of this Part, an amount equal to the whole discount, and
b
in a case where credits in respect of part of the discount were not brought into account for the purposes of this Part, an amount equal to that part of the discount.
4
The non-qualifying territory condition referred to in subsection (1)(d) is that the creditor company is—
a
resident for tax purposes in a non-qualifying territory at any time in the accounting period, or
b
effectively managed in a non-taxing non-qualifying territory at any such time.
5
In this section—
- “
discount
” means the difference between the two amounts referred to in subsection (1)(b);
- “
non-qualifying territory
” has the meaning given in section 173 of TIOPA 2010;
- “
non-taxing non-qualifying territory
” means a non-qualifying territory under whose law companies are not liable to tax by reason of domicile, residence or place of management;
- “
resident for tax purposes
” means liable, under the law of the non-qualifying territory, to tax there by reason of domicile, residence or place of management.

Transactions not at arm's length: exchange gains and losses

Exchange gains and losses on debtor relationships: loans disregarded under Part 4 of TIOPA 2010
447
1
Subsections (2) and (3) apply if—
a
a company has a debtor relationship in an accounting period,
b
an exchange gain or loss arises in the period in respect of a liability representing the relationship, and
c
as a result of section 147(3) or (5) of TIOPA 2010 (provision not at arm's length) the profits and losses of the company are calculated for tax purposes for the period as if—
i
the loan had not been made, or
ii
part of the loan had not been made.
2
In a case where subsection (1)(c)(i) applies, the exchange gain or loss must be be left out of account in determining the credits or debits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part.
3
In a case where subsection (1)(c)(ii) applies, a proportion of the exchange gain or loss must be left out of account in determining those credits or debits.
4
That proportion is the proportion that the part of the loan that is treated as if it had not been made bears to the whole of the loan.
4A
If the debtor relationship is to any extent matched, subsections (2) and (3) apply to leave out of account only the lesser of—
a
the amount of the exchange gain or loss (in the case of subsection (2)) or the proportion of the exchange gain or loss (in the case of subsection (3)) which would be left out of account apart from this subsection, and
b
the amount of the exchange gain or loss arising in respect of a liability representing the debtor relationship to the extent that the debtor relationship is unmatched (an amount which may be nil).
5
Nothing in Part 4 of TIOPA 2010 requires the amounts brought into account under this Part in respect of exchange gains or losses from loan relationships to be calculated on the assumption that the arm's length provision had been made instead of the actual provision.
6
But subsection (5) does not affect the application of subsections (2) and (3) under subsection (1).
7
In this section “the arm's length provision” and “the actual provision” have the same meaning as in Part 4 of TIOPA 2010 (see sections 149 and 151 of that Act).

Exchange gains and losses on debtor relationships: equity notes where holder associated with issuer
448
1
This section applies if—
a
a company has a debtor relationship in an accounting period,
b
an exchange gain or loss arises in the period in respect of a liability representing the relationship, and
c
the whole of any interest or other distribution out of the assets of the company in respect of securities of the company which represent the relationship is regarded as a distribution because of section 1015(6) of CTA 2010 (equity notes held by company associated with issuer or by a funded company).
2
The exchange gain or loss must be left out of account in determining the credits or debits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part.
3
If the debtor relationship is to any extent matched, subsection (2) applies to leave out of account only the amount of the exchange gain or loss arising in respect of a liability representing the debtor relationship to the extent that the debtor relationship is unmatched (an amount which may be nil).

Exchange gains and losses on creditor relationships: no corresponding debtor relationship
449
1
This section applies if—
a
a company has a creditor relationship in an accounting period, and
b
an exchange gain or loss arises in the period in respect of an asset representing the relationship.
2
The exchange gain or loss must be left out of account in determining the credits or debits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part if conditions A and B are met.
3
Condition A is that the transaction giving rise to the loan is such that it would not have been entered into at all if the parties had been dealing at arm's length.
4
Condition B is that there is no corresponding debtor relationship.
4A
If the creditor relationship is to any extent matched, subsection (2) applies to leave out of account only the amount of the exchange gain or loss arising in respect of an asset representing the creditor relationship to the extent that the creditor relationship is unmatched (an amount which may be nil).
5
For the meaning of “corresponding debtor relationship”, see section 450.
6
This section is subject to section 451 (exception to this section where loan exceeds arm's length amount).

Meaning of “corresponding debtor relationship”
450
1
In section 449 “corresponding debtor relationship” means a debtor relationship which—
a
corresponds to the creditor relationship mentioned in section 449(1), and
b
is of such a kind that conditions A and B are met.
2
Condition A is that such credits as are mentioned in subsection (3) would fall to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of exchange gains from that debtor relationship.
3
Those credits are credits corresponding to, and of the same amount as, the debits that would fall to be so brought into account in respect of exchange losses from the creditor relationship apart from section 449.
4
Condition B is that such debits as are mentioned in subsection (5) would fall to be so brought into account in respect of exchange losses from that debtor relationship.
5
Those debits are debits corresponding to, and of the same amount as, the credits that would fall to be so brought into account in respect of exchange gains from the creditor relationship apart from section 449.
6
In determining for the purposes of this section whether credits or debits would fall to be so brought into account, section 328(3) to (7) (as a result of which some exchange gains and losses are excluded from this Part) is ignored.

Exception to section 449 where loan exceeds arm's length amount
451
1
Section 449 does not apply if the circumstances are such that, had the parties to the relevant transaction been dealing at arm's length, the amount of the loan would have been an amount (“the arm's length amount”) greater than nil, but less than its actual amount.
2
Accordingly, an exchange gain or loss which arises in the accounting period in respect of an asset representing the creditor relationship is not required by that section to be left out of account.
3
But if—
a
the circumstances are as mentioned in subsection (1), and
b
there is no corresponding debtor relationship,
only a proportion of the exchange gain or loss may be taken into account in determining the credits or debits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part.
4
That proportion is the proportion which the arm's length amount bears to the actual amount of the loan.
4A
If the creditor relationship is to any extent matched, subsections (3) and (4) apply to leave out of account only the lesser of—
a
the proportion of the exchange gain or loss which would be left out of account apart from this subsection, and
b
the amount of the exchange gain or loss arising in respect of an asset representing the creditor relationship to the extent that the creditor relationship is unmatched (an amount which may be nil).
5
In this section—
- “corresponding debtor relationship” has the same meaning as in section 449 (see section 450), and
- “the relevant transaction” means the transaction giving rise to the loan as a result of which the company has the creditor relationship in the accounting period in question.

Exchange gains and losses where loan not on arm's length terms
452
1
This subsection applies if—
a
a company would be treated as having a debtor relationship in an accounting period if a claim were made under section 192(1) of TIOPA 2010 in relation to that period, and
b
for that period there is a connection between that company and the company that would have the corresponding creditor relationship.
2
If subsection (1) applies, it is assumed that such a claim is made for the purpose of determining the debits or credits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of any exchange gains or losses arising in that period in respect of the liability representing that debtor relationship.
3
Subsections (4) and (5) apply if, because of a claim made under section 192(1) of TIOPA 2010, or because of the claim that is assumed to be made under subsection (2)—
a
one company is treated for any purpose as having a debtor relationship, or
b
more than one company is treated for any purpose as having a debtor relationship represented by the same liability.
4
The total amount of the credits brought into account for the purposes of this Part in respect of exchange gains from that debtor relationship (in a subsection (3)(a) case) or from those debtor relationships (in a subsection (3)(b) case) must not exceed the total amount of the exchange gains or the proportion of the exchange gains to be left out of account under section 447 by the issuing company in respect of the loan relationship.
5
The total amount of the debits brought into account for those purposes in respect of exchange losses from that debtor relationship (in a subsection (3)(a) case) or from those debtor relationships (in a subsection (3)(b) case) must not exceed the total amount of the exchange losses or the proportion of the exchange losses to be left out of account under section 447 by the issuing company in respect of the loan relationship.
5A
In this section “
issuing company
” is to be construed in accordance with section 191(1)(a) of TIOPA 2010.
6
Section 466 (companies connected for an accounting period) applies for the purposes of this section.

Connected parties deriving benefit from creditor relationships

Connected parties deriving benefit from creditor relationships
453. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tax advantages from resetting interest rates (“reset bonds”)

Application of fair value accounting: reset bonds etc
454. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Disposals for consideration not fully recognised by accounting practice

Disposals for consideration not fully recognised by accounting practice
455. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Derecognition

Debits arising from derecognition of creditor relationships
455A
1
This section applies where—
a
a company is at any time a party to tax avoidance arrangements,
b
as a result of those arrangements, a creditor relationship to which the company is party, or any part of such a relationship, is (in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice) derecognised by the company, and
c
the company continues to be a party to the creditor relationship immediately after the transaction or other event giving rise to the derecognition.
2
No debit that would apart from this section be brought into account by the company for the purposes of this Part as a result of the derecognition is to be so brought into account.
3
An amount that would be brought into account for the purposes of this Part as respects any matter apart from this section—
a
is treated for the purposes of section 464(1) (priority of this Part for corporation tax purposes) as if it were so brought into account, and
b
accordingly, may not be brought into account for any other corporation tax purposes as respects that matter.
4
For the purposes of this section a company is to be treated as a party to a creditor relationship even though it has disposed of its rights under the relationship to another person—
a
under a repo or stock lending arrangement, or
b
under a transaction which is treated as not involving any disposal as a result of section 26 of
TCGA
1992 (mortgages and charges not to be treated as disposals).
5
For the purposes of this section arrangements are “tax avoidance arrangements” if the main purpose, or one of the main purposes, of any party to the arrangements, in entering into them, is to obtain a tax advantage.
6
In subsection (5) “
arrangements
” includes any arrangements, scheme or understanding of any kind, whether or not legally enforceable, involving a single transaction or two or more transactions.

Counteracting avoidance arrangements

Counteracting effect of avoidance arrangements
455B
1
Any loan-related tax advantages that would (in the absence of this section) arise from relevant avoidance arrangements are to be counteracted by the making of such adjustments as are just and reasonable in relation to credits and debits to be brought into account for the purposes of this Part.
2
Any adjustments required to be made under this section (whether or not by an officer of Revenue and Customs) may be made by way of an assessment, the modification of an assessment, amendment or disallowance of a claim, or otherwise.
3
For the meaning of “relevant avoidance arrangements” and “loan-related tax advantage”, see section 455C.

Interpretation of section 455B
455C
1
This section applies for the interpretation of section 455B (and this section).
2
“Arrangements” include any agreement, understanding, scheme, transaction or series of transactions (whether or not legally enforceable).
3
Arrangements are “relevant avoidance arrangements” if their main purpose, or one of their main purposes, is to enable a company to obtain a loan-related tax advantage.
4
But arrangements are not “relevant avoidance arrangements” if the obtaining of any loan-related tax advantages that would (in the absence of section 455B) arise from them can reasonably be regarded as consistent with any principles on which the provisions of this Part that are relevant to the arrangements are based (whether expressed or implied) and the policy objectives of those provisions.
5
A company obtains a “loan-related tax advantage” if—
a
it brings into account a debit to which it would not otherwise be entitled,
b
it brings into account a debit which exceeds that to which it would otherwise be entitled,
c
it avoids having to bring a credit into account,
d
the amount of any credit brought into account by the company is less than it would otherwise be, or
e
it brings a debit or credit into account earlier or later than it otherwise would.
6
In subsection (5), references to bringing a debit or credit into account are references to bringing a debit or credit into account for the purposes of this Part.

Examples of results that may indicate exclusion not applicable
455D
1
Each of the following is an example of something which might indicate that arrangements whose main purpose, or one of whose main purposes, is to enable a company to obtain a loan-related tax advantage are not excluded by section 455C(4) from being “
relevant avoidance arrangements
” for the purposes of section 455B—
a
the elimination or reduction, for purposes of corporation tax, of profits of a company arising from any of its loan relationships, where for economic purposes profits, or greater profits, arise to the company from that relationship;
b
the creation or increase, for purposes of corporation tax, of a loss or expense arising from a loan relationship, where for economic purposes no loss or expense, or a smaller loss or expense, arises from that relationship;
c
preventing or delaying the recognition as an item of profit or loss of an amount that would apart from the arrangements be recognised in the company's accounts as an item of profit or loss or be so recognised earlier;
d
ensuring that a loan relationship is treated for accounting purposes in a way in which it would not have been treated in the absence of some other transaction forming part of the arrangements;
e
enabling a company to bring into account for the purposes of this Part a debit in respect of an exchange loss, in circumstances where a corresponding exchange gain would not give rise to a credit or would give rise to a credit of a smaller amount;
f
enabling a company to bring into account for the purposes of this Part a debit in respect of a fair value loss in circumstances where a corresponding fair value gain would not give rise to a credit or would give rise to a credit of a smaller amount;
g
ensuring that the effect of the provisions of Chapter 4 is to produce an overall reduction in the credits brought into account for the purposes this Part or an overall increase in the debits brought into account for those purposes;
h
bringing into account for the purposes of this Part an impairment loss or release debit in a case where the provisions of Chapter 6 would but for the arrangements have prevented this.
2
But in each case the result concerned is only capable of indicating that section 455C(4) is not available if it is reasonable to assume that such a result was not the anticipated result when the provisions of this Part that are relevant to the arrangements were enacted.
3
In subsection (1)(f) references to a fair value gain or a fair value loss, in relation to a company, are references respectively to—
a
a profit to be brought into account in relation to an asset or liability representing a loan relationship where fair value accounting is used for the period in question, or
b
a loss to be brought into account in relation to such an asset or liability where fair value accounting is used for the period in question.
4
“
Arrangements
” and “
loan-related tax advantage
” have the same meaning as in section 455C.
Chapter 16

Non-trading deficits: pre-1 April 2017 deficits and charities

Introduction to Chapter
456
1
This Chapter applies if—
a
for any accounting period a company has a non-trading deficit from its loan relationships under section 301(6), and
b
either—
i
that accounting period begins before 1 April 2017, or
ii
at the end of that accounting period the company is a charity.
2
In this Chapter “the deficit” and “the deficit period” mean that deficit and that period respectively (but see section 458(5)).
3
Sections 457 and 458 set out the rules about carrying the deficit forward to later accounting periods.
4
Sections 459 and 460 deal with claims for the deficit to be dealt with differently.
5
Sections 461 to 463 deal with the consequences of such claims.

Basic rule for deficits: carry forward to accounting periods after deficit period
457
1
The basic rule is that the deficit must be carried forward and set off against non-trading profits of the company for accounting periods after the deficit period in accordance with subsection (3) and section 458 (subject to subsection (2A)).
2
That rule does not apply to so much of the deficit as—
a
is surrendered as group relief under Part 5 of CTA 2010, or
b
is the subject of a claim by the company under section 459 (claim to set off deficit against profits of deficit period or earlier periods).
2A
If the company is a charity at the end of the deficit period, the deficit may not be carried forward and set off against non-trading profits (as described in subsection (1)) for an accounting period (and, accordingly, the deficit may not be surrendered as group relief under Part 5 of CTA 2010 for the purposes of subsection (2)(a)).
3
So much of the amount carried forward from the deficit period as is not the subject of a claim under section 458(1) must be set off against the non-trading profits of the company for the next accounting period after the deficit period.
4
Those profits are reduced accordingly.
5
In this Chapter “non-trading profits”, in relation to a company, means so much of the company's profits as does not consist of trading income for the purposes of section 37 of CTA 2010 (deduction of trading losses from total profits of the same or an earlier period).

Claim to carry forward deficit to later accounting periods
458
1
The company may make a claim for so much of the amount carried forward from the deficit period as is specified in the claim to be excepted from being set off against non-trading profits of the first accounting period after the deficit period (“the first later period”).
2
Any such claim must be made within the period of 2 years after the end of the first later period.
3
Subsection (4) applies if any amount is carried forward from the deficit period under section 457(1) which—
a
cannot be set off under section 457(3) against non-trading profits of the first later period, or
b
is the subject of a claim under subsection (1).
4
That amount is treated for the purposes of this Part as if it were—
a
an amount of non-trading deficit from the company's loan relationships for the first later period, and
b
an amount which falls to be carried forward and set against non-trading profits of later accounting periods under section 457(1).
5
Accordingly, section 457 and this section apply as if the first later period were the deficit period.

Claim to set off deficit against profits of deficit period or earlier periods
459
1
The company may make a claim for the whole or part of the deficit—
a
to be set off against any profits of the company (of whatever description) for the deficit period, or
b
to be carried back to be set off against profits for earlier accounting periods.
2
No claim may be made under subsection (1) in respect of a deficit which is surrendered as group relief under Part 5 of CTA 2010.
3
Subsection (1) does not apply if the company is a charity.
4
For time limits and other provisions applicable to claims under subsection (1), see section 460.
5
For what happens when a claim is made under subsection (1)(a), see section 461.
6
For what happens when a claim is made under subsection (1)(b), and for the profits available for relief where such a claim is made, see sections 462 and 463.

Time limits and procedure for claims under section 459(1)
460
1
A claim under section 459(1) must be made within—
a
the period of 2 years after the deficit period ends, or
b
such further period as an officer of Revenue and Customs allows.
2
Different claims may be made in respect of different parts of a non-trading deficit for any deficit period.
3
But no claim may be made in respect of any part of a deficit to which another such claim relates.

Claim to set off deficit against other profits for the deficit period
461
1
This section applies if a claim is made under section 459(1)(a) for the whole or part of the deficit to be set off against profits for the deficit period.
2
The general rule is that the amount to which the claim relates must be set off against the profits of the company for the deficit period which are identified in the claim.
3
Those profits are reduced accordingly.
4
The general rule is subject to subsections (5) and (7).
5
Relief for any deficit incurred in a trade in an earlier accounting period must be given before relief under this section.
6
But relief under this section must be given before relief is given against profits for the deficit period—
a
under section 37 or 62(1) to (3) of CTA 2010 (deduction of losses from total profits for the same or earlier accounting periods), or
b
as a result of a claim under section 459(1)(b) (carry-back) in respect of a deficit for a later period.
7
No relief may be given under this section against ring fence profits of the company within the meaning of Part 8 of CTA 2010 (oil activities).

Claim to carry back deficit to earlier accounting periods
462
1
This section applies if a claim is made under 459(1)(b) for the whole or part of the deficit to be carried back to be set off against profits for accounting periods before the deficit period.
2
The claim has effect only if it relates to an amount equal to the lesser of—
a
so much of the deficit as is not an amount in relation to which a claim is made under section 459(1)(a), and
b
the total amount of the profits available for relief under this section.
3
Section 463 explains which profits are so available.
4
The amount to which the claim relates is set off against those profits by treating them as reduced accordingly.
5
If those profits are profits for more than one accounting period, the relief is applied by setting off the amount to which the claim relates against profits for a later period before setting off any remainder of that amount against profits for an earlier period.

Profits available for relief under section 462
463
1
The profits available for relief under section 462 are the amounts which (apart from the relief) would be charged under this Part as profits for accounting periods ending within the permitted period, after giving every prior relief.
2
In this section—
- “the permitted period” means the period of 12 months immediately before the deficit period, and
- “prior relief” means a relief which subsection (5) provides must be given before relief under section 462.
3
If an accounting period ending within the permitted period begins before it, only a part of the amount which (apart from the relief) would be chargeable under this Part for that period, after giving every prior relief, is available for relief under section 462.
4
That part is so much as is proportionate to the part of the accounting period in the permitted period.
5
The reliefs which must be given before relief under section 462 are—
a
relief as a result of a claim under section 459(1)(a) (claim for deficit to be set off against total profits for the deficit period),
b
relief in respect of a loss or deficit incurred or treated as incurred in an accounting period before the deficit period,
c
relief under Part 6 of CTA 2010 (charitable donations relief) in respect of payments made wholly and exclusively for the purposes of a trade,
d
relief under section 37 of CTA 2010 (losses deducted from total profits of the same, or an earlier, accounting period), and
e
if the company is a company with investment business for the purposes of Part 16 (companies with investment business)—
i
any deduction in respect of management expenses under section 1219 (expenses of management of a company's investment business),
ii
relief under Part 6 of CTA 2010 in respect of payments made wholly and exclusively for the purposes of its business, and
iii
any allowance under Part 2 of CAA 2001 (plant and machinery allowances).
Chapter 16A

Non-trading deficits: post 1 April 2017 deficits

Introduction to Chapter
463A
1
This Chapter applies if—
a
for any accounting period beginning on or after 1 April 2017 a company has a non-trading deficit from its loan relationships under section 301(6), and
b
at the end of that accounting period the company is not a charity.
2
In this Chapter “the deficit” and “the deficit period” mean that deficit and that period respectively.
3
Sections 463B and 463C deal with claims to set off the deficit against profits of the deficit period or earlier periods.
4
Sections 463D to 463F deal with the consequences of such claims.
5
Sections 463G to 463I provide for so much of the deficit as is not—
a
set off against profits under section 463B, or
b
surrendered as group relief under Part 5 of CTA 2010,
to be carried forward to later accounting periods.

Claim to set off deficit against profits of deficit period or earlier periods
463B
1
The company may make a claim for the whole or part of the deficit—
a
to be set off against any profits of the company (of whatever description) for the deficit period, or
b
to be carried back to be set off against profits for earlier accounting periods.
2
No claim may be made under subsection (1) in respect of so much of the deficit as is surrendered as group relief under Part 5 of CTA 2010.
3
For time limits and other provisions applicable to claims under subsection (1), see section 463C.
4
For what happens when a claim is made under subsection (1)(a), see section 463D.
5
For what happens when a claim is made under subsection (1)(b), and the profits available for relief when such a claim is made, see sections 463E and 463F.

Time limits for claims under section 463B(1)
463C
1
A claim under section 463B(1) must be made within—
a
the period of 2 years after the deficit period ends, or
b
such further period as an officer of Revenue and Customs allows.
2
Different claims may be made in respect of different parts of a non-trading deficit for any deficit period.
3
But no claim may be made in respect of any part of a deficit to which another such claim relates.

Claim to set off deficit against profits for the deficit period
463D
1
This section applies if a claim is made under section 463B(1)(a) for the whole or part of the deficit to be set off against profits for the deficit period.
2
The amount of the deficit to which the claim relates must be set off against the profits of the company for the deficit period which are identified in the claim.
3
Those profits are reduced accordingly.
4
Relief under this section must be given before relief is given against profits for the deficit period—
a
under section 37 or 62(1) to (3) of CTA 2010 (deduction of losses from total profits for the same or earlier accounting periods), or
b
as a result of a claim under section 463B(1)(b) (carry-back) in respect of a deficit for a later period.
5
No relief may be given under this section against ring fence profits of the company within the meaning of Part 8 of CTA 2010 (oil activities) or contractor's ring fence profits of the company within the meaning of Part 8ZA of that Act (oil contractors).

Claim to carry back deficit to earlier periods
463E
1
This section applies if a claim is made under section 463B(1)(b) for the whole or part of the deficit to be carried back to be set off against profits for accounting periods before the deficit period.
2
The claim has effect only if it relates to an amount no greater than the lesser of—
a
so much of the deficit as is not an amount in relation to which a claim is made under section 463B(1)(a), and
b
the total amount of the profits available for relief under this section.
3
Section 463F explains which profits are so available.
4
The amount to which the claim relates is set off against those profits by treating them as reduced accordingly.
5
If those profits are profits for more than one accounting period, the relief is applied by setting off the amount to which the claim relates against profits for a later period before setting off any remainder of that amount against profits for an earlier period.

Profits available for relief under section 463E
463F
1
The profits available for relief under section 463E are the amounts which (apart from the relief) would be charged under this Part as profits for accounting periods ending within the permitted period after giving every prior relief.
2
In this section—
- “
the permitted period
” means the period of 12 months immediately before the deficit period, and
- “
prior relief
” means a relief which subsection (5) provides must be given before relief under section 463E.
3
If an accounting period ending within the permitted period begins before it, only a part of the amount which (apart from the relief) would be chargeable under this Part for the period, after giving every prior relief, is available for relief under section 463E.
4
That part is so much as is proportionate to the part of the accounting period in the permitted period.
5
The reliefs which must be given before relief under section 463E are—
a
relief as a result of a claim under section 459(1)(a) or section 463B(1)(a) (claim for deficit to be set off against total profits for the deficit period),
b
relief in respect of a loss or deficit incurred or treated as incurred in an accounting period before the deficit period,
c
relief under Part 6 of CTA 2010 (charitable donations relief in respect of payments made wholly and exclusively for the purposes of a trade),
d
relief under section 37 of CTA 2010 (losses deducted from total profits of the same or an earlier accounting period), and
e
if the company is a company with investment business for the purposes of Part 16 (companies with investment business)—
i
any deduction in respect of management expenses under section 1219 (expenses of management of a company's investment business),
ii
relief under Part 6 of CTA 2010 in respect of payments made wholly and exclusively for the purposes of its business, and
iii
any allowance under Part 2 of
CAA
2001 (plant and machinery allowances).

Carry forward of unrelieved deficit against total profits
463G
1
This section applies if conditions A to D are met.
2
Condition A is that—
a
any amount of the deficit (“the unrelieved amount”) is not—
i
set off against profits on a claim under section 463B(1), or
ii
surrendered as group relief under Part 5 of CTA 2010.
3
Condition B is that it is not the case—
a
that the company ceased to be a company with investment business in the deficit period, or
b
(if the company was a company with investment business immediately before the beginning of the deficit period) that its investment business became small or negligible in the deficit period.
4
Condition C is that (if the company is a Solvency 2 insurance company) it is not the case that the whole of the deficit is a shock loss.
5
Condition D is that (if the company is a general insurance company) the first accounting period after the deficit period is not an excluded accounting period.
6
The unrelieved amount is carried forward to the first accounting period after the deficit period.
7
The company may make a claim for the whole or part of the unrelieved amount to be set off against the company's total profits for the first accounting period after the deficit period.
8
If a claim is made under subsection (7)—
a
the unrelieved amount, or the part of it to which the claim relates, must be set off against the company's total profits for the first accounting period after the deficit period, and
b
those profits are reduced accordingly.
9
No claim may be made under subsection (7) in respect of so much of the unrelieved amount as is surrendered under Part 5A of CTA 2010 (group relief for carried-forward losses).
10
A claim under subsection (7) must be made within—
a
the period of two years after the end of the first accounting period after the deficit period, or
b
such further period as an officer of Revenue and Customs allows.
11
No relief may be given under this section against ring fence profits of the company within the meaning of Part 8 of CTA 2010 (oil activities) or contractor's ring fence profits of the company within the meaning of Part 8ZA of that Act (oil contractors).
12
If —
a
the company is a Solvency 2 insurance company, and
b
the deficit is partly (but not wholly) a shock loss,
subsections (6) to (9) have effect as if references to the unrelieved amount were to the eligible amount (see subsection (13)).
13
In this section “
the eligible amount
” means so much of the unrelieved amount as is not a shock loss; and for the purpose of determining how much of the unrelieved amount is, or is not, a shock loss, it is to be assumed that in setting off or surrendering amounts as mentioned in subsection (2)(a)(i) and (ii) the company uses shock losses before other amounts.
14
In this Chapter—
- “
company with investment business
” has the same meaning as in Part 16 (see section 1218B);
- “
excluded accounting period
” has the meaning given by section 269ZG of CTA 2010;
- “general insurance company” is to be interpreted in accordance with section 269ZG of CTA 2010;
- “
shock loss
” has the meaning given by section 269ZK of CTA 2010;
- “
Solvency 2 insurance company
” means an insurance company as defined in section 269ZP(2) of CTA 2010.
15
In this Chapter references to a company's investment business are to be construed in accordance with section 1219(2).

Carry forward of unrelieved deficit against non-trading profits
463H
1
Subsections (4) to (8) apply if—
a
section 463G would apply but for the fact that the company's investment business became small or negligible in the accounting period mentioned in subsection (3)(b) of that section,
b
section 463G would apply but for condition D in that section (no carry-forward to an excluded accounting period of a general insurance company), or
c
the company is a Solvency 2 insurance company and any amount of the deficit would be eligible to be carried forward under section 463G(6) were that amount not a shock loss (see section 463G(4), (12) and (13)).
2
Subsections (4) to (8) also apply if—
a
subsections (6) to (10) of section 463G would apply but for the fact that the company's investment business became small or negligible in the accounting period mentioned in section 463I(1)(c)(ii), or
b
subsections (6) to (10) of section 463G would apply but for section 463I(1)(d) (no carry-forward under those subsections to an excluded accounting period of a general insurance company).
3
In this section the “unrelieved amount”—
a
in a case within paragraph (a) or (b) of subsection (1), is to be interpreted in accordance with section 463G(2);
b
in a case within paragraph (c) of subsection (1), means the amount mentioned in that paragraph;
c
in a case within subsection (2), means so much of the deficit mentioned in section 463I(1)(a) as is not set off as mentioned in section 463I(1)(b)(i) or surrendered as mentioned in section 463I(1)(b)(ii).
4
The unrelieved amount is carried forward to the first accounting period (“period 2”) after—
a
(in a case within subsection (1)) the deficit period, or
b
(in a case within subsection (2)) the period mentioned in section 463I(1)(a).
5
So much of the unrelieved amount as is not the subject of a claim under subsection (7) must be set off against the non-trading profits of the company for period 2.
6
Those profits are reduced accordingly.
7
The company may make a claim for relief under subsection (5) not to be given in period 2 for the unrelieved amount or so much of it as is specified in the claim.
8
A claim under subsection (7) is effective if, and only if, it is made—
a
within the period of two years after the end of period 2, or
b
within such further period as an officer of Revenue and Customs may allow.
9
Subsection (10) applies if any amount is carried forward under subsection (4) to an accounting period (“the carry forward period”) and—
a
cannot be set off under subsection (5) against non-trading profits of that period, or
b
is the subject of a claim under subsection (7).
10
If the company continues to be a company with investment business throughout the carry forward period, subsections (4) to (8) have effect as if—
a
references to the unrelieved amount were to the amount mentioned in subsection (9), and
b
references to—
i
the deficit period, or
ii
the period mentioned in section 463I(1)(a),
were to the carry forward period.
11
In this section “
non-trading profits
”, in relation to a company, means so much of the company's profits as does not consist of trading income for the purposes of section 37 of CTA 2010 (deduction of trading losses from total profits of the same or an earlier period).

Re-application of section 463G if any deficit remains after previous application
463I
1
This section applies if—
a
any amount of the deficit is carried forward to an accounting period (“the later period”) of the company under section 463G(6),
b
any of that amount is not—
i
set off against the company's total profits for the later period on a claim under section 463G(7), or
ii
surrendered as group relief for carried-forward losses under Part 5A of CTA 2010,
c
it is not the case—
i
that the company ceased to be a company with investment business in the later period, or
ii
(if the company was a company with investment business immediately before the beginning of the later period) that its investment business became small or negligible in the later period, and
d
it is not the case that the first accounting period after the later period is an excluded accounting period of a general insurance company.
2
Subsections (6) to (10) of section 463G apply as if—
a
references to the unrelieved amount were to so much of the amount of the deficit carried forward to the later period as is not set off or surrendered as mentioned in subsection (1)(b), and
b
references to the deficit period were to the later period.
Chapter 17

Priority rules

Priority of this Part for corporation tax purposes
464
1
The amounts which are brought into account in accordance with this Part in respect of any matter are the only amounts which may be brought into account for corporation tax purposes in respect of it.
2
Subsection (1) is subject to any express provision to the contrary.
3
For further provisions relating to the rule in this section, see in particular—
a
section 445(2) (disapplication of section 444 where Part 4 of TIOPA 2010 applies),
b
section 465 (exclusion of distributions except in tax avoidance cases),
c
section 700 (relationship of Part 7 to this Part),
d
section 96(4) of CTA 2010 (write-off of government investment),
e
sections 286 to 287A of CTA 2010 (oil activities: loan relationships),
f
section 31(5) of TIOPA 2010 (computation of income subject to foreign tax),
g
section 112(5) of TIOPA 2010 (deduction for foreign tax where no credit available),
h
... and
i
section 640(2) of CTA 2010 (banks etc in compulsory liquidation: taxation of certain receipts).
4
See also the following sections (under which amounts prevented from being brought into account under this Part are treated as if they were so brought into account for the purposes of this section)—
a
section 327(5) and (6) (disallowance of imported losses etc), ...
b
section 441(4) and (5) (loan relationships for unallowable purposes) , and
c
section 455A(3) (debits arising from derecognition of creditor relationships).

Exclusion of distributions except in tax avoidance cases
465
1
Credits or debits relating to any amount falling, when paid, to be treated as a distribution must not be brought into account for the purposes of this Part, except, in the case of credits, so far as they are avoidance arrangement amounts (see subsection (4)).
2
Nothing in section 464(1) prevents amounts that are not brought into account because of subsection (1) from being brought into account for corporation tax purposes otherwise than under this Part.
3
But see the following provisions (under which some amounts are prevented from being distributions for corporation tax purposes and accordingly are within this Part)—
zza
section 420A(2) (hybrid capital instruments),
za
section 490(2) (holdings in OEICs, unit trusts and offshore funds treated as rights under creditor relationships),
a
section 523(2)(b) (shares subject to outstanding third party obligations and non-qualifying shares),
b
section 1019 of CTA 2010 (relevant alternative finance return under alternative finance arrangements),
c
section 1054 of CTA 2010 (building society dividends etc), ...
d
sections 1055 and 1057 of CTA 2010 (dividends, bonuses and other sums payable to shareholders in registered societies and UK agricultural or fishing co-operatives) , and
e
paragraph
44
of Schedule 2 to FA 2022 (distributions under certain securities issued by qualifying asset holding companies).
4
For the purposes of this section an amount is an avoidance arrangement amount if it arises in consequence of, or otherwise in connection with, arrangements of which the purpose, or one of the main purposes, is securing a tax advantage for any person.
5
In this section “arrangements” includes any scheme, agreement or understanding, transaction or series of transactions.
Chapter 18

General and supplementary provisions

Changes in accounting standards

Power to make regulations where accounting standards change
465A
1
The Treasury may by regulations make provision for cases where, in consequence of a change in accounting standards, there is a relevant accounting change.
2
“
Change in accounting standards
” means the issue, revocation, amendment or recognition of, or withdrawal of recognition from, an accounting standard by an accounting body.
3
“
Relevant accounting change
” means a change in the way in which a company is permitted or required, for accounting purposes, to recognise amounts which—
a
are brought into account by the company as credits or debits for any period for the purposes of this Part, or
b
would be so brought into account but for any provision made by or under this Part.
4
Regulations under subsection (1) may amend this Part (apart from this section).
5
Regulations under subsection (1) may—
a
make different provision for different cases,
b
make incidental, supplemental, consequential and transitional provision and savings, and
c
make provision subject to an election or other specified circumstances.
6
Regulations making consequential provision by virtue of subsection (5)(b) may, in particular, include provision amending a provision of the Corporation Tax Acts.
7
Regulations under subsection (1) may apply to a pre-commencement period if they make provision in relation to a relevant accounting change which may or must be adopted, for accounting purposes, for a period of account, or part of a period of account, which coincides with that pre-commencement period.
8
In this section—
- “
accounting body
” means the International Accounting Standards Board or the Accounting Standards Board, or a successor body to either of those Boards;
- “
accounting standard
” includes any statement of practice, guidance or other similar document;
- “
pre-commencement period
”, in relation to regulations, means an accounting period, or part of an accounting period, which begins before the regulations are made.

Tax-adjusted carrying value

“Tax-adjusted carrying value”
465B
1
This section applies for the purposes of this Part.
2
“
Tax-adjusted carrying value
”, in relation to the asset or liability representing a loan relationship, means the carrying value of the asset or liability recognised for accounting purposes, except as provided by subsection (8).
3
For the purposes of this section the “carrying value” of the asset or liability includes amounts recognised for accounting purposes in relation to the loan relationship in respect of—
a
accrued amounts,
b
amounts paid or received in advance, or
c
impairment losses (including provisions for bad or doubtful debts).
4
For the meaning of “impairment loss” see section 476(1).
5
In determining the tax-adjusted carrying value of an asset or liability in a period of account of a company, it is to be assumed that the accounting policy applied in drawing up the company's accounts for the period was also applied in previous periods of account.
6
But if the company's accounts for the period are in accordance with generally accepted accounting practice drawn up on an assumption as to the accounting policy in previous periods of account which differs from that mentioned in subsection (5), that different assumption applies in determining the tax-adjusted carrying value of the asset or liability in the period.
7
In determining the tax-adjusted carrying value of an asset or liability at a time other than the end (or beginning) of a period of account of a company, it is to be assumed that a period of account of the company had ended at the time in question.
8
In determining the tax-adjusted carrying value of the asset or liability, the provisions specified in subsection (9) apply as they apply for the purposes of determining the credits and debits to be brought into account under this Part.
9
Those provisions are—
a
section 308(1A) (amounts recognised in other comprehensive income and transferred to profit and loss),
b
sections 311 and 312 (amounts not fully recognised for accounting purposes),
c
section 320A (amounts recognised in other comprehensive income and not transferred to profit and loss),
d
section 323A (substantial modification: cases where credits not required to be brought into account),
da
section
323B
(insurers in financial difficulties: write-down orders),
e
section 324 (restriction on debits resulting from revaluation),
f
section 325 (restriction on credits resulting from reversal of disallowed debits),
g
sections 333 and 334 (company ceasing to be
UK
resident and non-UK company ceasing to hold loan relationship for
UK
permanent establishment),
h
Chapter 4 (continuity of treatment on transfers within groups or organisations),
i
section 349(2) (application of amortised cost basis of accounting to connected companies relationships),
j
section 352 (disregard of related transactions),
k
section 352A (exclusion of credits on reversal of disregarded loss),
ka
section 352B (eliminating tax mismatch for loan relationships with qualifying link),
l
section 354 (exclusion of debits for impaired or released connected companies debts),
m
section 360 (exclusion of credits on reversal of impairments of connected companies debts),
n
sections 361 to 363 (deemed debt releases on impaired debts becoming held by connected company),
o
Chapter 8 (connected parties relationships: late interest),
p
section 382 (company partners using fair value accounting),
q
sections 399 to 400C (treatment of index-linked gilt-edged securities),
r
section 404 (restriction on deductions
etc
relating to
FOTRA
securities),
s
sections 406 to 412 (deeply discounted securities and close companies),
t
section 415(2) (loan relationships with embedded derivatives),
u
Chapter 13 (European cross-border transfers of business), and
v
Chapter 14 (European cross-border mergers).

Connections between persons

Companies connected for an accounting period
466
1
This section and sections 467 to 471 have effect for the purposes of any provisions of this Part which apply this section (but this does not affect the application of section 1316(1) (meaning of “connected” persons) for other purposes of this Part).
2
There is a connection between a company (“A”) and another company (“B”) for an accounting period if there is a time in the period when—
a
A controls B,
b
B controls A, or
c
A and B are both controlled by the same person.
3
But A and B are not taken to be controlled by the same person just because they have been under the control of—
a
the Crown,
b
a Minister of the Crown,
c
a government department,
d
a Northern Ireland department,
e
a foreign sovereign power, or
f
an international organisation.
4
Subsection (2) is subject to section 468 (connection between companies to be ignored in some circumstances).
5
For a case where companies are treated as if one controlled the other, see section 383(5) (inter-partnership lending between connected company partners etc).
6
Section 472 (meaning of “control”) applies for the purposes of this section.

Connections where partnerships are involved
467
1
This section applies for the purposes of the provisions which apply section 466 (“the relevant provisions”) if—
a
a trade or business is carried on by a firm, and
b
the firm stands in the position of a creditor or debtor as respects a money debt.
2
The questions about connections specified in subsection (3) must be determined as if each of the partners in the firm separately (rather than the firm), stood in that position as respects the debt to the extent of that partner's appropriate share.
3
The questions are—
a
whether for the purposes of this Part there is a connection for the purposes of the relevant provisions between any two companies for an accounting period in the case of a loan relationship, and
b
how far any amount is treated under this Part in any particular way as a result of there being, or not being, such a connection.
4
For the purposes of subsection (2), a partner's “appropriate share” is the same share as the share in which any profit or loss for the accounting period in question would be apportioned to the partner in accordance with the firm's profit-sharing arrangements.
5
The references in subsections (2) to (4) to partners do not include references to the general partner of a limited partnership which is a collective investment scheme.

Connection between companies to be ignored in some circumstances
468
1
In the case of a company (“the creditor”) which has a creditor relationship, any connection for an accounting period between the creditor and another company which stands in the position of a debtor as respects the debt is ignored for the purposes of the relevant provisions if the creditor is a party to the relationship in circumstances where—
a
conditions A to E in section 469 (creditors who are financial traders) are met, or
b
conditions A, B and C in section 471 (creditors who are insurance companies carrying on basic life assurance and general annuity business) are met.
2
In subsection (1) “the relevant provisions” means any provisions of this Part which apply section 466.
3
Subsection (4) applies if for any accounting period subsection (1) has effect in the case of a creditor relationship of a company.
4
Subsection (1) does not apply for determining whether there is a connection between the two companies for the purposes of so much of any of the relevant provisions or of section 467 as relates to the corresponding debtor relationship.
5
For the purposes of this section and section 469, a company is treated as standing in the position of a debtor if it indirectly stands in that position by reference to a series of loan relationships or relevant money debts.
6
In subsection (5) “relevant money debt” means a money debt which would be a loan relationship if a company directly stood in the position of creditor or debtor.

Creditors who are financial traders
469
1
This section sets out the conditions referred to in section 468(1)(a).
2
Condition A is that the creditor disposes of or acquires assets representing creditor relationships in the course of carrying on any activities forming an integral part of a trade carried on by it in the accounting period.
3
Condition B is that the asset representing the creditor relationship was acquired in the course of those activities.
4
Condition C is that that asset—
a
is listed on a recognised stock exchange at the end of that period, or
b
is a security the redemption of which must occur within 12 months of its issue.
5
Condition D is that there is a time in that period when assets of the same kind as the asset representing the creditor relationship are beneficially owned by persons other than the creditor.
6
Condition E is that in that period there is not more than 3 months in total during which the equivalent of at least 30% of the assets of that kind is beneficially owned by connected companies.
7
Section 470 supplements this section.

Section 469: supplementary provisions
470
1
For the purposes of conditions D and E in section 469 assets are taken to be of the same kind if they—
a
are treated as being of the same kind by the practice of any recognised stock exchange, or
b
would be so treated if dealt with on such an exchange.
2
For the purposes of condition E in section 469 an asset is beneficially owned by a connected company if there is a connection between—
a
the company which beneficially owns it, and
b
a company which stands in the position of a debtor as respects the money debt by reference to which any loan relationship represented by that asset exists.
3
Whether there is a connection for the purposes of subsection (2) at any time in an accounting period (“the relevant time”) is determined in accordance with section 466(2), (3), (5) and (6)—
a
applying the conditions in section 466(2) only at the relevant time, and
b
ignoring section 468.

Creditors who are insurance companies carrying on BLAGAB
471
1
This section sets out the conditions referred to section 468(1)(b)).
2
Condition A is that the creditor is an insurance company carrying on basic life assurance and general annuity business in the accounting period.
3
Condition B is that the asset representing the creditor relationship is matched for that period to a BLAGAB liability.
4
Condition C is that conditions C, D and E in section 469 are met in relation to that asset.

Meaning of “control”
472
1
This section has effect for the purposes of any provisions of this Part which apply this section (but this does not affect the application of section 1316(2) (meaning of “control”) for other purposes of this Part).
2
For those purposes “control”, in relation to a company, means the power of a person to secure that the affairs of the company are conducted in accordance with the person's wishes—
a
by means of the holding of shares or the possession of voting power in or in relation to the company or any other company, or
b
as a result of any powers conferred by the articles of association or other document regulating the company or any other company.
3
Trading shares held by a company and any voting power or other powers arising from such shares are ignored for the purposes of this section.
4
For the purposes of subsection (3) shares held by a company are trading shares if—
a
a profit on a sale of the shares would be treated as a trading receipt of a trade carried on by the company, and
b
the shares are not assets held by an insurance company for the purposes of its long-term business.
5
Subsection (6) applies in the case of any firm to which section 1259 (calculation of firm's profits and losses) applies.
6
For any accounting period of the firm, property, rights or powers held or exercisable for its purposes are treated for the purposes of this section as if—
a
the property, rights or powers had been apportioned between, and were held or exercisable by, the partners severally, and
b
the apportionment had been in the same shares as those in which the profit or loss of the period would be apportioned between the partners in accordance with the firm's profit-sharing arrangements.
7
In subsection (6) the references to partners do not include references to the general partner of a limited partnership which is a collective investment scheme.

Meaning of “major interest”
473
1
In this Part references to a company (“A”) having a major interest in another company (“B”) are to be read as follows.
2
A has a major interest in B at any time if at that time—
a
A and one other person (“C”), taken together, have control of B, and
b
A and C each have interests, rights and powers representing at least 40% of the holdings, rights and powers as a result of which A and C are taken to have control of B.
3
The reference in subsection (2)(b) to interests, rights and powers does not include interests, rights or powers arising from shares held by a company if—
a
a profit on a sale of the shares would be treated as a trading receipt of a trade carried on by the company, and
b
the shares are not assets held by an insurance company for the purposes of its long-term business.
4
Section 474 makes provision about how this section operates where connected companies or partnerships are involved.
5
For the purposes of this section and section 474, a company (“D”) is connected with another company (“E”) if—
a
D controls E,
b
E controls D, or
c
D and E are both controlled by the same company.
6
Section 472 (meaning of “control”) applies for the purposes of this section and section 474.
7
If two or more persons taken together have the power mentioned in section 472(2) (as read with the other provisions of section 472) as respects the affairs of a company (“B”), they are taken for the purposes of subsection (2)(a) to have control of B.

Treatment of connected companies and partnerships for section 473
474
1
For the purposes of section 473(2), all the interests, rights and powers of any company connected with another company are attributed to the other company before determining any question—
a
whether two persons taken together have control of a company at any time, or
b
whether a person has at any time interests, rights and powers representing at least 40% of the holdings, rights and powers in respect of a company.
2
If section 1259 (calculation of firm's profits and losses) applies, any property, rights or powers held or exercisable for the purposes of the firm are treated for the purposes of section 473, as respects any time in an accounting period of the firm, on the basis of the assumptions in subsection (3).
3
The assumptions are that—
a
the property, rights or powers had been apportioned between, and were held or exercisable by, the partners in the firm severally, and
b
the apportionment was in the same shares as those in which the profit or loss of the accounting period would be apportioned between the partners under the firm's profit-sharing arrangements.
4
Subsection (5) applies if—
a
a trade or business is carried on by a firm, and
b
the firm stands in the position of a creditor or debtor as respects a money debt.
5
The questions in subsection (6) are to be determined as if each of the partners in the firm separately, instead of the firm, stood in the position of a creditor or, as the case may be, a debtor as respects the money debt to the extent of that partner's appropriate share (see subsection (8)).
6
The questions are—
a
whether a company has a major interest in another company for an accounting period in the case of a loan relationship, or
b
how far any amount is treated under this Part in any particular way as a result of a company having or, as the case may be, not having such a major interest.
7
The references to partners in subsections (3) and (5) do not include a reference to the general partner of a limited partnership which is a collective investment scheme.
8
For the purposes of subsection (5), a partner's “appropriate share” is the same share as the partner's share under the firm's profit-sharing arrangements of any profit or loss calculated in accordance with section 1259 for the accounting period in question.

Meaning of expressions relating to exchange gains and losses
475
1
References in this Part to exchange gains or exchange losses, in relation to a company, are references respectively to—
a
profits or gains which arise as a result of comparing at different times the expression in one currency of the whole or some part of the valuation put by the company in another currency on an asset or liability of the company, or
b
losses which so arise.
2
If the result of such a comparison is that neither an exchange gain nor an exchange loss arises, for the purposes of this Part an exchange gain of nil is taken to arise in the case of that comparison.
3
The Treasury may make provision by regulations as to the way in which exchange gains or losses are to be calculated for the purposes of this section ... .
4
The regulations may be made so as to apply to periods of account beginning before the regulations are made, but not earlier than the beginning of the calendar year in which they are made.
5
Any reference in this Part to an exchange gain or loss from a loan relationship of a company is a reference to an exchange gain or loss arising to a company in relation to an asset or liability representing a loan relationship of the company.

Meaning of “hedging relationship”

“Hedging relationship”
475A
1
This section applies for the purposes of this Part.
2
A company has a “hedging relationship” between a relevant contract (“the hedging instrument”) and an asset or liability (“the hedged item”) so far as condition A or B is met.
3
Condition A is that the hedging instrument and the hedged item are designated as a hedge by the company.
4
Condition B is that—
a
the hedging instrument is intended to act as a hedge of the exposure to changes in fair value of the hedged item which is attributable to a particular risk and could affect the profit or loss of the company, and
b
the hedged item is an asset or liability recognised for accounting purposes or is an identified portion of such an asset or liability.
5
For the purposes of subsections (2) and (4), the liabilities of a company include its own share capital.

Meaning of “matched”

Meaning of “matched”
475B
1
This section applies for the purposes of this Part.
2
A loan relationship of a company is matched if and to the extent that—
a
it is in a matching relationship with another loan relationship or a derivative contract of the company, or
b
exchange gains or losses arising in relation to an asset or liability representing the loan relationship are excluded from being brought into account under regulations under section 328(4),
and “
unmatched
” is to be construed accordingly.
3
A loan relationship is in a matching relationship with another loan relationship or derivative contract if one is intended by the company to act to eliminate or substantially reduce the economic risk of the other.
4
In this section “
economic risk
” means a risk which can be attributed to fluctuations in exchange rates between currencies over a period of time.
5
In this section “
derivative contract
” has the same meaning as in Part 7 (see section 576).

Meaning of “hybrid capital instrument”

Meaning of “hybrid capital instrument”
475C
1
For the purposes of this Part, a loan relationship is a “hybrid capital instrument” for an accounting period of the debtor if—
a
the loan relationship makes provision under which the debtor is entitled to defer or cancel a payment of interest under the loan relationship,
b
the loan relationship has no other significant equity features, and
c
the debtor has made an election in respect of the loan relationship which has effect for the period.
2
For the purposes of this section a loan relationship “has no other significant equity features” if under the loan relationship—
a
there are neither voting rights in the debtor (ignoring insignificant voting rights in the debtor) nor a right to exercise a dominant influence over the debtor,
b
any provision for altering the amount of the debt is limited to write-down or conversion events in qualifying cases, and
c
any provision for the creditor to receive anything other than interest or repayment of the debt is limited to conversion events in qualifying cases.
3
For the purposes of subsection (2)(a)—
a
the loan relationship makes provision for “insignificant voting rights in the debtor” if (and only if) the voting rights of any creditor under the loan relationship are limited to one vote exercisable in relation to matters generally affecting the debtor without conferring any special advantage or other right on the creditor, and
b
“a right to exercise a dominant influence over the debtor” means a right to give directions with respect to the debtor’s operating and financial policies with which it is obliged to comply (whether or not they are for the debtor’s benefit).
4
For the purposes of subsection (2)(b) a “write-down event” means—
a
a permanent release of some or all of the debt, or
b
a reduction in the amount of the debt (including to nil) in a case where provision is made for the reduction to be temporary (whether on the meeting of conditions or the exercise of a right or otherwise).
5
For the purposes of subsection (2) a “conversion event” means—
a
the conversion of the loan relationship into shares forming part of the debtor’s ordinary share capital, or
b
the conversion of the loan relationship into shares forming part of the ordinary share capital of
a company (“C”) which, after the conversion, has control of the debtor or would have control of the debtor if C were taken to have all the rights and interests in the debtor of any company connected with C
.
...
6
For the purposes of subsection (2), a loan relationship makes provision for a qualifying case if—
a
the provision applies only in the event that there is a material risk of the debtor becoming unable to pay its debts as they fall due,
b
the provision applies only in the event that the value of the debtor’s assets is less than the amount of its liabilities, taking into account contingent and prospective liabilities, or
c
the provision is included in the loan relationship solely because of a need to comply with a regulatory or other legal requirement,
and, in each case, the provision in question does not include a right exercisable by the creditor.
7
Provision is not to be regarded as failing to meet the condition in subsection (2)(b) merely because, in the case of a write-down event mentioned in subsection (4)(b), it provides for a subsequent increase in the amount of the debt (but not above the original amount).
8
An election under this section—
a
is irrevocable,
b
must be made before the end of the period of 6 months beginning with—
i
the day on which the company becomes a party to the loan relationship, or
ii
if (after becoming a party to the loan relationship) the loan relationship is amended so as to meet the conditions in subsection (1)(a) and (b), the first day of the company’s next accounting period, and
c
has effect for the accounting period in which the day mentioned in paragraph (b)(i) or (ii) falls and for subsequent accounting periods.
9
But an election under this section has no effect if—
a
the company is a party to the loan relationship directly or indirectly in consequence of, or otherwise in connection with, any arrangements (within the meaning of section 455C(2)), and
b
the main purpose of, or one of the main purposes of, the arrangements is to secure a tax advantage for the company or any other person.

Other general definitions

Other definitions
476
1
In this Part—
- “
accounting policy
”, in relation to a company, means the principles, bases, conventions, rules and practices that the company applies in preparing and presenting its financial statements,
- “alternative finance arrangements” has the meaning given in section 501(2),
- “associate” has the meaning given by section 448 of CTA 2010,
- “collective investment scheme” has the meaning given by section 235 of FISMA 2000,
- “debt” includes a debt the amount of which is to be ascertained by reference to matters which vary from time to time,
- “equity instrument” has the meaning it has for accounting purposes,
- “
fair value
” has the meaning it has for accounting purposes,
- “gilt-edged securities” means any securities which—
  1. are gilt-edged securities for the purposes of TCGA 1992 (see Schedule 9 to that Act), or
  2. will be such securities on the making of any order under paragraph 1 of Schedule 9 to that Act the making of which is anticipated in the prospectus under which they are issued,
- “impairment” includes uncollectability,
- “impairment loss” means a debit in respect of the impairment of a financial asset,
- “income statement” has the meaning it has for accounting purposes,
- “international organisation” has the meaning given in subsection (2) (and also see subsection (3)),
- “loan” includes any advance of money and related expressions are to be read accordingly,
- “non-trading credit” and “non-trading debit” are to be read in accordance with section 301 (but also see sections 330 and 482(1)),
- “profit-sharing arrangements”, in relation to a firm, has the meaning given in section 1262(4) (allocation of firm's profits or losses between partners),
- “
release debit
”, in relation to a company, means a debit in respect of a release by the company of a liability under a creditor relationship of the company,
- “
relevant contract
” has the same meaning as in Part 7 (see section 577),
- “share”, in relation to a company, means any share in the company under which an entitlement to receive distributions may arise (except as provided in section 522(6)), but does not include a share in a building society,
- “statement of changes in equity” has the meaning it has for accounting purposes,
- “statement of comprehensive income” has the meaning it has for accounting purposes,
- “statement of income and retained earnings” has the meaning it has for accounting purposes,
- “statement of recognised income and expense” has the meaning it has for accounting purposes,
- “statement of total recognised gains and losses” has the meaning it has for accounting purposes,
- “tax advantage”, except in the expression “loan-related tax advantage”, has the meaning given by section section 1139 of CTA 2010,
- “this Part” is to be read in accordance with section 294(2), and
- “trade” and “purposes of trade” are to be read in accordance with section 298.
2
In this Part “international organisation” means an organisation of which—
a
two or more sovereign powers are members, or
b
the governments of two or more sovereign powers are members.
3
If, in any proceedings, any question arises whether a person is an international organisation for the purposes of any provision of this Part, a certificate issued by or under the authority of the Secretary of State stating any fact relevant to that question is conclusive evidence of that fact.
Word in s. 362 heading inserted (with effect in accordance with s. 23(4) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), s. 23(2)(d)
S. 359(3) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 34(3)
S. 349(3)(4) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 28(3)
Words in s. 431(4) substituted (31.12.2020) by The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(7)(a) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
Words in s. 424(4) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 42(3)
S. 394 omitted (17.7.2012) by virtue of Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 156
S. 307(2A)-(2C) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 4(3)
Words in s. 345(1)(b) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 606 (with Sch. 2)
S. 445(3A) inserted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 133(8) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
S. 308(2)(3) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 5(4)
Words in s. 464(3)(g) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 90(b) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Word in s. 400(1)(b) substituted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with s. 60(4) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), s. 60(2)(a)
S. 428 applied (with modifications) (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), ss. 117(6), 119(5), 381(1) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Words in Pt. 5 Ch. 16 heading inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 190 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2017 (c. 32), Sch. 4 para. 2
Words in s. 363(4) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 40
Word in s. 313(2)(g) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 7(3)(c)
Ss. 466-471 applied by 2010 c. 4, s. 937K(8) (as inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 16 para. 5 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 16 para. 3)
S. 418A inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 30 para. 4(8) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 30 para. 4(7)
Pt. 5 Ch. 16A inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 190 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2017 (c. 32), Sch. 4 para. 4
Words in s. 376(3) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 610(3)(b) (with Sch. 2)
S. 440(2)(h) and word inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 45(c)
S. 375 excluded by S.I. 2006/3296, reg. 19(1) (as substituted (with effect in accordance with reg. 1(2)(3) of the amending S.I.) by The Taxation of Securitisation Companies (Amendment) Regulations 2018 (S.I. 2018/143), regs. 1(1), 10(3))
S. 409(2) disapplied (24.2.2022) by Finance Act 2022 (c. 3), Sch. 2 para. 51(1)
S. 337(4A)(4B) inserted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 149(4)
Words in s. 329(2) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 22(3)
S. 354(2A) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 32
Words in s. 475(3) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 53
Words in s. 363 heading substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 40
Words in s. 448(1)(c) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 617 (with Sch. 2)
S. 302(1) applied (19.7.2011) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 19 para. 26(7)
Words in s. 387(1) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 190 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2017 (c. 32), Sch. 4 para. 132
S. 465 disapplied (24.2.2022) by Finance Act 2022 (c. 3), Sch. 2 para. 44(2)
S. 306A and cross-heading inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 3
S. 472 applied by 2010 c. 4, s. 357BC(10) (as inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 2 para. 7 8 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 2 para. 1(1))
S. 408 omitted (with effect in accordance with s. 25(6)-(14) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2015 (c. 11), s. 25(2)(d)
Words in s. 364(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 608 (with Sch. 2)
Words in s. 463(5)(c) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 621(a) (with Sch. 2)
S. 406(1)(a) omitted (with effect in accordance with s. 25(6)-(14) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2015 (c. 11), s. 25(5)(a)
S. 313(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 7(7)
Words in s. 464(3)(f) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 90(a) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
S. 320A inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 14
S. 323(A1) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 17
Words in s. 313(2) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 7(3)(a)
Words in s. 375(3)(b) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 para. 9 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 20 para. 3(3)
Words in Act substituted (1.8.2014) by virtue of Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies Act 2014 (c. 14), s. 154, Sch. 4 para. 142 (with Sch. 5)
S. 311(7)-(9) inserted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 13 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 4 para. 2(5)
S. 433(3)(a) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 43(a)
Words in s. 429(3) omitted (31.12.2020) by virtue of The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(5)(a) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
S. 358(4)-(6) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 15 para. 3(3) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 15 para. 2(3)(c) (with Sch. 15 para. 4)
S. 398(2)(a)(aa) substituted for s. 398(2)(a) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 14 para. 8 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 14 para. 2 (with Sch. 14 para. 9)
S. 313(2)(e)(f) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 7(3)(b)
S. 361D inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 37
S. 375(4A) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 para. 9 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 20 para. 3(4)
Words in s. 418(7) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 30 para. 4(8) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 30 para. 4(5)
Words in s. 315 heading substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 9(5)
Words in s. 322(4) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 15 para. 3(1) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 15 para. 1(2) (with Sch. 15 para. 4)
Pt. 5 modified (with effect in accordance with reg. 1(2)(3) of the amending S.I.) by The Taxation of Regulatory Capital Securities Regulations 2013 (S.I. 2013/3209), regs. 1(1), 11(3)-(6)
S. 373(1) disapplied (24.2.2022) by Finance Act 2022 (c. 3), Sch. 2 para. 50(1)
Words in s. 476(1) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 55(a)
Words in s. 311(6) omitted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 13 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 4 para. 2(4)(a)(ii)
Words in s. 457(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 618(3) (with Sch. 2)
S. 456(1)(b) and word inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 190 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2017 (c. 32), Sch. 4 para. 3(b)
Pt. 5 applied (with modifications) (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), ss. 990(5), 1184(1) (with Sch. 2)
Words in s. 463(5)(e)(ii) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 621(c) (with Sch. 2)
S. 313(2)(i) and word omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 7(3)(d)
Words in s. 459(1)(a) substituted (retrospective and with effect in accordance with art. 1(2) of the amending S.I.) by Corporation Tax Act 2009 (Amendment) Order 2010 (S.I. 2010/614), arts. 1(1), 3(3)
Words in s. 465(3)(c) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 623(b) (with Sch. 2)
S. 400(2A) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 14 para. 8 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 14 para. 5(4) (with Sch. 14 para. 9)
Words in s. 410(4)(b) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 para. 9 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 20 para. 8(2)
Words in s. 461(6)(a) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 620(2) (with Sch. 2)
S. 447(4A) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 para. 12 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2016 (c. 24), Sch. 7 para. 5
Word in s. 464(4)(a) omitted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 13 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 4 para. 6
Words in s. 390(4) substituted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 154(2)
Words in s. 411(3) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 614(a) (with Sch. 2)
S. 324(3A) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 19
Definition in s. 410(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 para. 9 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 20 para. 8(4)
Words in s. 418(1)(b) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 30 para. 4(8) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 30 para. 4(2)
Words in s. 421(4) substituted (31.12.2020) by The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(4)(a) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
Words in s. 471(3) substituted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 159
Words in s. 371(1) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 609(2)(d) (with Sch. 2)
Words in s. 430(2) substituted (31.12.2020) by The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(6)(b) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
Pt. 5 Ch. 4 modified (1.1.2010) by Northern Rock plc (Tax Consequences) Regulations 2009 (S.I. 2009/3227), regs. 1, 5
Word in s. 400A(7)(b) substituted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with s. 60(4) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), s. 60(2)(b)
Words in s. 418 heading substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 30 para. 4(8) of the commencing Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 30 para. 4(6)
S. 322(5B) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 16(4)
S. 308(1A)(1B) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 5(3)
Words in s. 337(3A) substituted (1.1.2016) by The Solvency 2 Regulations 2015 (S.I. 2015/575), reg. 1(2), Sch. 1 para. 26(2)
S. 313(3) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 7(4)
Words in s. 322(7) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 16(6)
Word in s. 440(2)(e) omitted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 13 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 4 para. 4
S. 320(5) substituted for s. 320(5)(6) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 13(4)
S. 476(1) definition excluded (1.3.2013) by The Building Societies (Core Capital Deferred Shares) Regulations 2013 (S.I. 2013/460), regs. 1(1), 3(1)(d) (with reg. 1(2))
Words in s. 326(3) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 605(b) (with Sch. 2)
Words in s. 476(1) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 55(d)
S. 441(3A) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 46
Word in s. 315 cross-heading substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 8
Words in Act substituted (1.8.2014) by Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies Act 2014 (c. 14), s. 154, Sch. 4 para. 143 (with Sch. 5)
S. 418(6A)-(6C) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 30 para. 4(8) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 30 para. 4(4)
S. 443 omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 48
S. 306(2)(za) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 2(a)
S. 393 and cross-heading omitted (17.7.2012) by virtue of Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 156
S. 358(4)(4A) substituted for s. 358(4) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 33(2)
S. 475C and cross-heading inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 paras. 10(a), 16 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2019 (c. 1), Sch. 20 para. 3(1) (with Sch. 20 paras. 3(2), 19)
Word in s. 362(1)(a) inserted (with effect in accordance with s. 23(4) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), s. 23(2)(a)(ii)
Word in s. 406(2) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 25(6)-(14) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2015 (c. 11), s. 25(5)(b)
Words in s. 322(5A) inserted (1.1.2015) by The Bank Recovery and Resolution Order 2014 (S.I. 2014/3329), arts. 1(2), 123
S. 316 substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 10
S. 312(1)(b) and preceding word omitted (27.7.2010) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2010 (c. 31), Sch. 5 para. 2(2)
S. 475A and cross-heading inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 54
Pt. 5 modified by 2010 c. 4, s. 356NB(1)-(4) (as inserted (1.4.2014) by Finance Act 2014 (c. 26), Sch. 16 paras. 4, 6)
S. 374 excluded by S.I. 2006/3296, reg. 19(1) (as substituted (with effect in accordance with reg. 1(2)(3) of the amending S.I.) by The Taxation of Securitisation Companies (Amendment) Regulations 2018 (S.I. 2018/143), regs. 1(1), 10(3))
Words in s. 439(2) substituted (31.12.2020) by The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(9)(b)(i) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
Ss. 400-400C excluded (with effect in accordance with s. 148 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), s. 112(1) (with s. 147, Sch. 17)
Word in s. 431(9)(a) substituted (31.12.2020) by The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(7)(d)(i) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
Words in s. 445(3) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 133(6) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Pt. 5 modified by 2007 c. 3, s. 809FZZ(9) (as inserted (with effect in accordance with s. 37(4) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2016 (c. 24), s. 37(2))
Ss. 361A-361C inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 15 para. 3(2) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 15 para. 2(5) (with Sch. 15 para. 4)
Words in s. 318(4) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 12(4)
Words in s. 464(3)(e) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 87(3) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2013 (c. 29), s. 87(2)
Word in s. 373(1)(b) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 25(6)-(14) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2015 (c. 11), s. 25(4)
Words in s. 312(4)(b) substituted (27.7.2010) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2010 (c. 31), Sch. 5 para. 2(4)(b)
S. 307(6) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 4(5)
S. 379 excluded by S.I. 2006/3296, reg. 19(1) (as substituted (with effect in accordance with reg. 1(2)(3) of the amending S.I.) by The Taxation of Securitisation Companies (Amendment) Regulations 2018 (S.I. 2018/143), regs. 1(1), 10(3))
Ss. 400A-400C inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 14 para. 8 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 14 para. 6 (with Sch. 14 para. 9)
Words in s. 439(2) substituted (31.12.2020) by The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(9)(b)(ii) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
Words in s. 362(5)(a) inserted (with effect in accordance with s. 23(4) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), s. 23(2)(c)(ii)
Words in s. 452(5) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 para. 12 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2016 (c. 24), Sch. 7 para. 9(4)(b)
Pt. 5 modified (with effect in accordance with s. 148 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), s. 88(1)(2)(7) (with s. 147, Sch. 17)
S. 377 omitted (with effect in accordance with s. 25(6)-(14) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2015 (c. 11), s. 25(2)(b)
Words in s. 315(2)(a) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 9(3)(b)
Words in s. 452(4) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 para. 12 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2016 (c. 24), Sch. 7 para. 9(3)(b)
Words in s. 312(4)(b) substituted (27.7.2010) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2010 (c. 31), Sch. 5 para. 2(4)(a)
Words in s. 450(6) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 49
Words in s. 464(3)(a) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 138 (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
S. 410(5A) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 para. 9 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 20 para. 8(5)
S. 321 omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 15
Words in s. 411(3) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 614(b) (with Sch. 2)
S. 473 applied by 2010 c. 4, s. 938E(11) (as inserted (19.7.2011) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 5 para. 2)
Pt. 5 modified by 2010 c. 4, s. 356NC(1)-(4) (as inserted (1.4.2014) by Finance Act 2014 (c. 26), Sch. 16 paras. 4, 6)
Words in s. 435(4) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 44(3)
Word in s. 298(3)(a) inserted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 147(2)(a)
S. 455A and cross-heading inserted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 13 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 4 para. 5
S. 420A and cross-heading inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 paras. 10(a), 16 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2019 (c. 1), Sch. 20 para. 2
S. 322(4A) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 16(3)
Words in s. 445(1) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 133(2) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Words in s. 447(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 135(3) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
S. 358 excluded by 2010 c. 4, s. 814D(10) (as inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 29 para. 51 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2013 (c. 29), Sch. 29 para. 2)
Word in s. 318 heading substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 12(7)
Ss. 331, 332 omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 24
Word in s. 406(4) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 25(6)-(14) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2015 (c. 11), s. 25(5)(b)
Pt. 5 modified (30.9.2013) by The BRB (Residuary) Limited (Tax Consequences) Order 2013 (S.I. 2013/2242), arts. 1, 7
Ss. 455B-455D and cross-heading inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 51
Words in s. 346(2) omitted (with effect in accordance with s. 28(4) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2014 (c. 26), s. 28(2)(a)
S. 446(8) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 para. 12 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2016 (c. 24), Sch. 7 para. 3
Word in s. 465(3) omitted (24.2.2022) by virtue of Finance Act 2022 (c. 3), Sch. 2 para. 56(3)
Words in s. 312(1B) omitted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 13 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 4 para. 3(3)
S. 399(4) substituted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with s. 60(4) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), s. 60(1)
S. 440(2)(g) and word inserted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 13 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 4 para. 4
Words in s. 430(2) substituted (31.12.2020) by The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(6)(a) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
S. 452(5A) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 para. 12 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2016 (c. 24), Sch. 7 para. 9(5)
Words in s. 431(5) substituted (31.12.2020) by The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(7)(b) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
Words in s. 375(1) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 para. 9 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 20 para. 3(2)
Words in s. 464(3)(i) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 622(c) (with Sch. 2)
Pt. 5 modified by 2010 c. 4, s. 676AG(1) (as inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 190 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2017 (c. 32), Sch. 4 para. 75)
Definition in s. 376(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 para. 9 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 20 para. 4(2)
S. 298(3)(c) and the word immediately preceding it omitted (17.7.2012) by virtue of Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 147(2)(b)
S. 465(3)(za) inserted (with effect in accordance with s. 27(7)-(9) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2014 (c. 26), s. 27(2)
S. 464(1) excluded (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), ss. 96(4), 640, 1184(1) (with Sch. 2)
Words in s. 465(3)(b) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 623(a) (with Sch. 2)
S. 398(2)(f) and word inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 para. 10(b) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2019 (c. 1), Sch. 20 para. 7(2)(b)
S. 374 omitted (with effect in accordance with s. 25(6)-(14) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2015 (c. 11), s. 25(2)(a)
S. 386(2)(c) and the word immediately preceding it omitted (17.7.2012) by virtue of Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 150(2)(b)
Words in s. 452(4) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 para. 12 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2016 (c. 24), Sch. 7 para. 9(3)(a)
Words in s. 342(4) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 26(3)
Words in s. 386(3)(f) substituted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 150(3)(c)
Words in s. 364(4) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 190 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2017 (c. 32), Sch. 4 para. 130(2)
S. 475C: power to amend conferred (12.2.2019) by Finance Act 2019 (c. 1), Sch. 20 para. 19(1)
S. 474 applied by 2010 c. 4, s. 938E(11) (as inserted (19.7.2011) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 5 para. 2)
S. 362(3)(4) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 23(4) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), s. 23(2)(b)
S. 416(4) omitted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 5 para. 7(3)(4) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 5 para. 7(2)(c)
Words in s. 475C(5) omitted (retrospectively) by virtue of The Taxation of Hybrid Capital Instruments (Amendment of Section 475C of the Corporation Tax Act 2009) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/1250), regs. 1(2), 2(1)(b) (with reg. 2(2))
Words in s. 328(1) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 20(2)
S. 372(3)(c) omitted (with effect in accordance with s. 25(6)-(14) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2015 (c. 11), s. 25(3)(c)
Words in s. 463(5)(d) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 621(b) (with Sch. 2)
S. 465 disapplied (24.2.2022) by Finance Act 2022 (c. 3), Sch. 2 para. 45(3)
Words in s. 310(2) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 6(a)
Words in s. 444(3) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 132 (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Words in s. 445(1)(a)(b) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 133(3) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Pt. 5 Ch. 4 modified (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), ss. 601, 1184(1) (with Sch. 2)
S. 315(1) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 9(2)
Words in s. 371(2) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 609(3) (with Sch. 2)
S. 452(3) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 para. 12 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2016 (c. 24), Sch. 7 para. 9(2)
S. 407 omitted (with effect in accordance with s. 25(6)-(14) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2015 (c. 11), s. 25(2)(c)
Words in s. 390(5) substituted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 154(3)(a)
S. 445(3)(a)(aa) substituted for s. 445(3)(a) (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 133(7) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
S. 323A inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 18
Pt. 5 modified (1.4.2012) by Budget Responsibility and National Audit Act 2011 (c. 4), s. 29, Sch. 4 para. 2; S.I. 2011/2576, art. 5
Words in s. 383(8) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 611 (with Sch. 2)
Words in s. 400(1)(a) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 14 para. 8 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 14 para. 5(3)(a) (with Sch. 14 para. 9)
Word in s. 400(2) substituted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with s. 60(4) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), s. 60(2)(a)
Pt. 5 Chs. 6-8 modified (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), ss. 601, 1184(1) (with Sch. 2)
S. 376(6) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 para. 9 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 20 para. 4(3)
S. 451(4A) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 para. 12 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2016 (c. 24), Sch. 7 para. 8
Words in s. 457(2)(a) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 618(2) (with Sch. 2)
S. 310(5) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 6(b)
Words in s. 371(3) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 609(4) (with Sch. 2)
Words in s. 358(2) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 15 para. 3(3) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 15 para. 2(3)(b) (with Sch. 15 para. 4)
Words in s. 334 heading substituted (6.4.2020) by Finance Act 2019 (c. 1), Sch. 5 paras. 17(2), 35 (with Sch. 5 para. 36)
Definition in s. 476(1) inserted (22.4.2009 retrospective) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), s. 42(3)(12)
Ss. 350, 351 omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 29
Words in s. 386(3)(a) inserted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 150(3)(b)
Word in s. 400(6) substituted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with s. 60(4) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), s. 60(2)(a)
S. 315(3) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 9(4)
S. 390(6) substituted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 154(4)
S. 352B: power to amend conferred (with effect in accordance with Sch. 12 paras. 3, 4 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2019 (c. 1), Sch. 12 para. 5
S. 377 excluded by S.I. 2006/3296, reg. 19(1) (as substituted (with effect in accordance with reg. 1(2)(3) of the amending S.I.) by The Taxation of Securitisation Companies (Amendment) Regulations 2018 (S.I. 2018/143), regs. 1(1), 10(3))
Words in s. 346(1)(a) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 607(a) (with Sch. 2)
Words in s. 433(3)(b) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 43(b)
S. 318(2) substituted for s. 318(2)(3) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 12(3)
S. 302(1) applied by 2011 c. 11, Sch. 19 para. 15Z2(7) (as inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 9 para. 35 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2018 (c. 3), Sch. 9 para. 2)
Words in s. 421(3) substituted (31.12.2020) by The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(4)(a) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
S. 322(5A) inserted (with effect in accordance with s. 26(4) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2014 (c. 26), s. 26(3)
S. 466 applied by S.I. 2004/3256, reg. 7A(5) (as inserted (with application in accordance with reg. 1(2) of the amending S.I.) by Loan Relationships and Derivative Contracts (Disregard and Bringing into Account of Profits and Losses) (Amendment) Regulations 2009 (S.I. 2009/1886), regs. 1(1), 5)
S. 352A inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 31
Words in s. 322(2) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 26(4) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2014 (c. 26), s. 26(2)
S. 363 applied (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), s. 23(4)(b)
S. 362(6) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 38
Ss. 406-412 excluded by S.I. 2006/3296, reg. 19(3) (as substituted (with effect in accordance with reg. 1(2)(3) of the amending S.I.) by The Taxation of Securitisation Companies (Amendment) Regulations 2018 (S.I. 2018/143), regs. 1(1), 10(3))
Word in s. 400A(3) substituted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with s. 60(4) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), s. 60(2)(b)
Words in s. 440(2)(a) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 45(a)(ii)
S. 363A inserted (with effect in accordance with s. 23(5)-(7) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), s. 23(3)
S. 362(5)(c) and the word immediately preceding it omitted (with effect in accordance with s. 23(4) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), s. 23(2)(c)(iii)
Words in s. 410(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 131(3) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Words in s. 465(3)(d) substituted (1.8.2014) by Co-operative and Community Benefit Societies Act 2014 (c. 14), s. 154, Sch. 4 para. 144 (with Sch. 5)
S. 464(4)(c) and word inserted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 13 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 4 para. 6
Words in s. 376(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 610(4) (with Sch. 2)
S. 328(3)-(3C) substituted for s. 328(3) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 20(4)
S. 346(3)-(5) omitted (with effect in accordance with s. 28(4) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2014 (c. 26), s. 28(2)(b)
S. 320B inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 para. 10(b) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2019 (c. 1), Sch. 20 para. 5
Ss. 473, 474 applied by 2010 c. 4, s. 357GD(11) (as inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 2 paras. 7, 8 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 2 para. 1(1))
S. 475B and cross-heading inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 para. 12 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2016 (c. 24), Sch. 7 para. 10
Words in s. 465(3)(d) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 623(c) (with Sch. 2)
S. 345 applied (with effect in accordance with reg. 1(2) of the amending S.I.) by Mutual Societies (Transfers of Business) (Tax) Regulations 2009 (S.I. 2009/2971), regs. 1(1), 25(5)(a) (with reg. 25(6))
Words in s. 387(1) inserted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 151
S. 312(1A) substituted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 13 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 4 para. 3(2)
S. 352B inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 12 paras. 3, 4 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2019 (c. 1), Sch. 12 para. 1
Words in s. 362(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 23(4) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), s. 23(2)(c)(i)
Words in s. 345(2) omitted (with effect in accordance with s. 28(4) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2014 (c. 26), s. 28(2)(a)
Ss. 466-471 applied by 2010 c. 4, s. 938E(11) (as inserted (19.7.2011) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 5 para. 2)
Words in s. 311(6) inserted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 13 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 4 para. 2(4)(a)(i)
Pt. 5 applied (with effect in accordance with Sch. 24 paras. 13-16 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 24 para. 15(2)(3)
Words in s. 445(2)(b) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 133(5) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Words in s. 430(1) substituted (1.7.2011) by The Corporation Tax (Implementation of the Mergers Directive) Regulations 2011 (S.I. 2011/1431), regs. 1(2), 4(2)
S. 448(3) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 para. 12 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2016 (c. 24), Sch. 7 para. 6
Words in s. 452(4) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 para. 12 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2016 (c. 24), Sch. 7 para. 9(3)(c)
Words in s. 340(7) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 126 (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Words in s. 334(1) substituted (6.4.2020) by Finance Act 2019 (c. 1), Sch. 5 paras. 17(3), 35 (with Sch. 5 para. 36)
S. 416 excluded (with effect in accordance with reg. 1(2)(3) of the amending S.I.) by The Taxation of Regulatory Capital Securities Regulations 2013 (S.I. 2013/3209), regs. 1(1), 3(2)(a) (with reg. 8)
Words in s. 447(1)(c) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 135(2) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Words in s. 353(6) inserted (22.4.2009 retrospective) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), s. 42(2)(b)(12)
Words in s. 390(5) substituted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 154(3)(b)
Words in s. 390(5) substituted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 154(3)(d)
S. 318(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 12(5)
S. 422(3)(a) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 41(a)
Words in s. 390(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 612(2) (with Sch. 2)
S. 320(4) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 13(3)
Words in s. 475C(5)(b) substituted (retrospectively) by The Taxation of Hybrid Capital Instruments (Amendment of Section 475C of the Corporation Tax Act 2009) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/1250), regs. 1(2), 2(1)(a) (with reg. 2(2))
Words in s. 297(5)(c) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 604 (with Sch. 2)
S. 418(2)(3) substituted for s. 418(2)-(4) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 30 para. 4(8) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 30 para. 4(3)
Word in s. 398(2)(d) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 para. 10(b) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2019 (c. 1), Sch. 20 para. 7(2)(a)
Words in s. 410(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 613 (with Sch. 2)
S. 311(2)(b) substituted (19.7.2011) for s. 311(2)(b)(c) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 13 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 4 para. 2(2)(b)
Words in s. 336(4) substituted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 148(2)
Words in s. 334(3)(b) substituted (6.4.2020) by Finance Act 2019 (c. 1), Sch. 5 paras. 17(4), 35 (with Sch. 5 para. 36)
Words in s. 476(1) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 624(b) (with Sch. 2)
Words in s. 386(3)(a) omitted (17.7.2012) by virtue of Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 150(3)(a)
S. 372(3)(a) omitted (with effect in accordance with s. 25(6)-(14) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2015 (c. 11), s. 25(3)(a)
Ss. 454, 455 omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 50
Words in s. 340(6)(c) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 25(b)
Words in s. 383(8) substituted (1.4.2009 retrospective) by Corporation Tax Act 2009 (Amendment) Order 2009 (S.I. 2009/2860), arts. 1(2), 6(2)
S. 475C(8)(b)(c) substituted (retrospectively) by The Taxation of Hybrid Capital Instruments (Amendment of Section 475C of the Corporation Tax Act 2009) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/1250), regs. 1(2), 3 (with reg. 2(2))
S. 328(4A) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 20(6)
S. 318(7)(8) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 12(6)
Words in s. 464(3)(e) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 622(b) (with Sch. 2)
Words in s. 315(2) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 9(3)(a)
S. 320(1)-(3) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 13(2)
Word in s. 409(1)(b) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 para. 9 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 20 para. 7(a)
Word in s. 406(3) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 25(6)-(14) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2015 (c. 11), s. 25(5)(b)
Words in s. 388(3) substituted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 152
Words in s. 353(2)(b) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 15 para. 3(2) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 15 para. 2(2) (with Sch. 15 para. 4)
S. 361(7) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 35(4)
Words in s. 431(10) renumbered as s. 431(10)(a) (31.12.2020) by The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(7)(e)(i) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
S. 318(1)(b) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 12(2)
S. 328(5) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 20(6)
S. 440(2)(f) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 45(b)
S. 328(2)(2A) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 20(3)
Word in s. 431(7)(b) substituted (31.12.2020) by The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(7)(c) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
S. 415 applied by 2010 c. 8, s. 493 (as inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 5 para. 25(1)-(3) of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2017 (c. 32), Sch. 5 para. 1 (with Sch. 5 paras. 27, 32-34))
Words in s. 446(1) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 134(2) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
S. 446A and cross-heading inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 para. 12 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2016 (c. 24), Sch. 7 para. 2
Ss. 466-471 applied by 2010 c. 4, s. 357GD(11) (as inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 2 para. 7 8 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 2 para. 1(1))
Words in s. 429(4) substituted (31.12.2020) by The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(5)(b) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
Words in s. 476(1) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 55(c)
S. 453 omitted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 5 para. 8(2)(3) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 5 para. 8(1)
Words in s. 456(1) renumbered as s. 456(1)(a) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 190 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2017 (c. 32), Sch. 4 para. 3(a)
S. 464(3)(h) omitted (17.7.2012) by virtue of Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 158
S. 361(1)(f) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 35(2)
Words in s. 424(3) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 42(2)
Pt. 5 modified (15.11.2011 for specified purposes, 30.3.2012 for E.W.) by Localism Act 2011 (c. 20), ss., 240(5)(o), Sch. 24 para. 5; S.I. 2012/628, art. 3(b)
Words in s. 400(1)(a) substituted (retrospective and with effect in accordance with art. 1(2) of the commencing S.I.) by Corporation Tax Act 2009 (Amendment) Order 2010 (S.I. 2010/614), arts. 1(1), 3(2)
Words in s. 440(2)(a) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 45(a)(i)
S. 399(3) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 14 para. 8 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 14 para. 4(3) (with Sch. 14 para. 9)
Words in s. 452(5) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 para. 12 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2016 (c. 24), Sch. 7 para. 9(4)(a)
S. 337(3A) inserted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 149(2)
S. 362(1)(c) omitted (with effect in accordance with s. 23(4) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), s. 23(2)(a)(i)
S. 345 excluded (with effect in accordance with reg. 1(2) of the amending S.I.) by Mutual Societies (Transfers of Business) (Tax) Regulations 2009 (S.I. 2009/2971), regs. 1(1), 25(3)(b) (with reg. 25(6))
S. 328(4)(4ZA) substituted for s. 328(4) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 20(5)
Words in s. 431(11)(b) substituted (31.12.2020) by The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(7)(f) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
Words in s. 364(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 190 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2017 (c. 32), Sch. 4 para. 130(3)
Word in s. 322(2) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 16(2)
S. 362A inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 39
Words in s. 376(1) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 610(2) (with Sch. 2)
S. 313(6)(7) substituted for s. 313(6) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 7(8)
S. 400 heading substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 14 para. 8 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 14 para. 5(2) (with Sch. 14 para. 9)
Words in s. 376(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 128(2) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
S. 449(4A) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 para. 12 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2016 (c. 24), Sch. 7 para. 7
S. 399(6) inserted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 157
Words in s. 446 title substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 134(2) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
S. 399 cross-heading substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 14 para. 8 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 14 para. 3 (with Sch. 14 para. 9)
S. 415 excluded (with effect in accordance with reg. 1(2)(3) of the amending S.I.) by The Taxation of Regulatory Capital Securities Regulations 2013 (S.I. 2013/3209), regs. 1(1), 3(2)(a) (with reg. 8)
S. 361(1)(a)-(c) modified (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), s. 23(8)-(12)
Words in s. 375(4)(b) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 para. 9 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 20 para. 3(3)
Words in s. 476(1) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 624(a) (with Sch. 2)
Word in s. 306(2)(c) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 2(b)
Words in s. 473(3)(b) substituted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 161
S. 349 disapplied (24.2.2022) by Finance Act 2022 (c. 3), Sch. 2 para. 39(1)
S. 466 applied (with effect in accordance with reg. 1(2) of the amending S.I.) by S.I. 2004/3256, reg. 5ZA (as inserted by The Disregard and Bringing into Account of Profit and Losses on Derivative Contracts Hedging Acquisitions and Disposals of Shares Regulations 2022 (S.I. 2022/239), regs. 1(1), 2(4))
Words in s. 452(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 para. 12 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2016 (c. 24), Sch. 7 para. 9(4)(c)
Words in s. 409(1) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 para. 9 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 20 para. 7(b)
Word in s. 400(3) substituted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with s. 60(4) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), s. 60(2)(a)
S. 349(2A) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 28(2)
Words in s. 445 title substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 133(11) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
S. 340(6)(a) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 25(a)
Words in s. 447(7) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 135(4) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
S. 307(3)-(5) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 4(4)
S. 353(3) omitted (22.4.2009 retrospective) by virtue of Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), s. 42(2)(a)(12)
S. 441 excluded by 2010 c. 4, s. 938N (as inserted (19.7.2011) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 5 para. 2)
Words in s. 310(1)(a)(b) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 6(a)
Ss. 361A, 361B omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 36
S. 333(2)(b)-(d) inserted (6.4.2020) by Finance Act 2019 (c. 1), Sch. 5 paras. 16(b), 35 (with Sch. 5 para. 36)
Words in s. 376(3) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 610(3)(a) (with Sch. 2)
Words in s. 461(7) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 620(3) (with Sch. 2)
Words in s. 371(1) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 609(2)(a) (with Sch. 2)
Words in s. 445(2)(a) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 133(4) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Words in s. 445(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 133(10) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Word in s. 311(2)(a) inserted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 13 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 4 para. 2(2)(a)
Words in s. 464(3)(d) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 622(a) (with Sch. 2)
Words in s. 439(1) omitted (31.12.2020) by virtue of The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(9)(a) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
Words in s. 438(4) omitted (31.12.2020) by virtue of The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(8) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
S. 333(2) renumbered as s. 333(2)(a) (6.4.2020) by virtue of Finance Act 2019 (c. 1), Sch. 5 paras. 16(a), 35 (with Sch. 5 para. 36)
Ss. 473, 474 applied by 2010 c. 4, s. 357BC(10) (as inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 2 paras. 7, 8 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 2 para. 1(1))
Words in s. 390(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 612(3) (with Sch. 2)
Words in s. 342(3) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 26(2)
Words in s. 446(4) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 134(2) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Words in s. 446(2) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 134(2) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Words in s. 445(4) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 133(9) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Words in s. 421(5)(b) omitted (31.12.2020) by virtue of The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(4)(b) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
Words in s. 447 title substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 135(5) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Words in s. 410(3)(b) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 para. 9 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 20 para. 8(2)
Word in s. 311(6)(b) omitted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 13 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 4 para. 2(4)(b)
Words in s. 431(9)(a) omitted (31.12.2020) by virtue of The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(7)(d)(ii) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
Words in s. 359(1)(d) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 34(2)
Words in s. 313(4) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 7(5)
S. 322(6A) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 16(5)
S. 321A inserted (with effect in accordance with s. 43(2) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), s. 43(1)
S. 474 applied by 2010 c. 4, s. 937K(8) (as inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 16 para. 5 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 16 para. 3)
S. 347 omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 27
Word in s. 372(3)(b) inserted (with effect in accordance with s. 25(6)-(14) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2015 (c. 11), s. 25(3)(b)
S. 361(2) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 35(3)
S. 427 applied (with modifications) (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), ss. 117(6), 119(5), 381(1) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Words in s. 326(3) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 605(a) (with Sch. 2)
S. 473 applied by 2010 c. 4, s. 937K(8) (as inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 16 para. 5 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 16 para. 3)
Words in s. 376(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 128(3) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Words in s. 363(1) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 40
Words in s. 386(2)(a) inserted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 150(2)(a)
Words in s. 452(1)(a) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 136 (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Words in s. 472(4)(b) substituted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 160
Words in s. 358(1)(a) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 15 para. 3(3) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 15 para. 2(3)(a) (with Sch. 15 para. 4)
Words in s. 435(3) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 44(2)
S. 306(2)(g) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 2(c)
Words in s. 459(2) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 619 (with Sch. 2)
Words in s. 301(1) substituted (6.4.2020) by Finance Act 2019 (c. 1), Sch. 5 paras. 15(2), 35 (with Sch. 5 para. 36)
Words in s. 329(1)(c) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 22(2)
S. 410(4A) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 para. 9 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2009 (c. 10), Sch. 20 para. 8(3)
Word in s. 311(6)(a) omitted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 13 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 4 para. 2(4)(b)
Words in s. 312(3) substituted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 13 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 4 para. 3(4)
Words in s. 371 substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 190 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2017 (c. 32), Sch. 4 para. 131
S. 431(10)(b) inserted (31.12.2020) by The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(7)(e)(ii) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
S. 298(6) inserted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 147(3)
S. 317 omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 11
S. 391(3) substituted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 155
Words in s. 337(4)(a) substituted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 149(3)
Words in s. 419(6) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 615 (with Sch. 2)
S. 399 heading substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 14 para. 8 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 14 para. 4(2) (with Sch. 14 para. 9)
S. 465A and cross-heading inserted (8.4.2010) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 19 para. 1
Words in s. 371(1) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 609(2)(e) (with Sch. 2)
Words in s. 422(3)(b) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 41(b)
Ss. 418-419 omitted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 5 para. 7(3)(4) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 5 para. 7(1)
S. 465(3)(e) and word inserted (24.2.2022) by Finance Act 2022 (c. 3), Sch. 2 para. 56(3)
S. 352(3A)-(3C) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 30
Words in s. 307(2) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 4(2)
S. 311(3)-(5A) omitted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 13 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), Sch. 4 para. 2(3)
S. 465B(9)(ka) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 12 paras. 3, 4 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2019 (c. 1), Sch. 12 para. 2
Words in s. 308(1) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 5(2)
S. 313(4A) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 7(6)
Pt. 5 Ch. 4 modified (1.10.2011) by Postal Services Act 2011 (c. 5), s. 93(2)(3), Sch. 2 para. 5; S.I. 2011/2329, art. 3
Words in s. 421(6) inserted (31.12.2020) by The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(4)(c) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
S. 345(3)-(5) omitted (with effect in accordance with s. 28(4) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2014 (c. 26), s. 28(2)(b)
Words in s. 413(3) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 11 para. 12(2) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2013 (c. 29), Sch. 11 para. 11
S. 465(3)(zza) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 para. 10(b) of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2019 (c. 1), Sch. 20 para. 7(3)
Word in s. 400(1)(a) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 14 para. 8 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2010 (c. 13), Sch. 14 para. 5(3)(b) (with Sch. 14 para. 9)
Words in s. 476(1) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 55(b)
Ss. 330A-330C and cross-heading inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 23
S. 441 excluded by 2010 c. 4, s. 938V(a) (as inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 20 para. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance Act 2013 (c. 29), Sch. 20 para. 3)
S. 389(2A) inserted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 153
S. 330ZA and cross-heading inserted (6.4.2020) by Finance Act 2020 (c. 14), Sch. 6 paras. 3, 10
Pt. 5 Ch. 16A modified by 2010 c. 4, s. 676AH(1) (as inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 4 para. 190 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2017 (c. 32), Sch. 4 para. 75)
Words in s. 346(1)(b) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 607(b) (with Sch. 2)
S. 358(7)(8) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 33(3)
Words in s. 439(1) substituted (1.7.2011) by The Corporation Tax (Implementation of the Mergers Directive) Regulations 2011 (S.I. 2011/1431), regs. 1(2), 4(3)
S. 336(4A) inserted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 148(3)
S. 442(1A) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 47
S. 301(1A) inserted (6.4.2020) by Finance Act 2019 (c. 1), Sch. 5 paras. 15(3), 35 (with Sch. 5 para. 36); and substituted (6.4.2020) by Finance Act 2020 (c. 14), Sch. 6 paras. 1, 10
Ss. 328A-328H omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 21
S. 328(6) substituted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 20(7)
Words in s. 390(5) substituted (17.7.2012) by Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), Sch. 16 para. 154(3)(c)
S. 334(5) inserted (6.4.2020) by Finance Act 2019 (c. 1), Sch. 5 paras. 17(5), 35 (with Sch. 5 para. 36)
Pt. 5 Ch. 4 excluded by S.I. 2006/3296, reg. 19(2) (as substituted (with effect in accordance with reg. 1(2)(3) of the amending S.I.) by The Taxation of Securitisation Companies (Amendment) Regulations 2018 (S.I. 2018/143), regs. 1(1), 10(3))
Words in s. 446(6) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 134(2) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
S. 336 excluded (24.2.2022) by Finance Act 2022 (c. 3), Sch. 2 para. 33(3)(b)
S. 464(1) excluded by 2010 c. 4, s. 357YV(2) (as inserted (with effect in accordance with s. 38(9)-(12) of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), s. 38(3))
Words in s. 313(1) omitted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 7(2)
S. 465B and cross-heading inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 7 Pt. 6 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2015 (c. 33), Sch. 7 para. 52
Words in s. 371(1) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 1184(1) of the amending Act) by Corporation Tax Act 2010 (c. 4), s. 1184(1), Sch. 1 para. 609(2)(c) (with Sch. 2)
Words in s. 421(7) substituted (31.12.2020) by The Taxes (Amendments) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 (S.I. 2019/689), regs. 1, 16(4)(a) (with regs. 39-41); 2020 c. 1, Sch. 5 para. 1(1)
Words in s. 410(5) substituted (with effect in accordance with s. 381(1) of the amending Act) by Taxation (International and Other Provisions) Act 2010 (c. 8), s. 381(1), Sch. 8 para. 131(2) (with Sch. 9 paras. 1-9, 22)
Word in s. 362(1)(b) omitted (with effect in accordance with s. 23(4) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2012 (c. 14), s. 23(2)(a)(ii)
S. 419(6A) inserted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with s. 29(3)(4) of the amending Act) by virture of Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), s. 29(2)
S. 418(2) words inserted (19.7.2011) (with effect in accordance with s. 29(3)(4) of the amending Act) by virtue of Finance Act 2011 (c. 11), s. 29(1)
S. 323B inserted (11.7.2023) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2023 (c. 30), s. 32(3)
S. 457(2A) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 3 para. 30-36 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2023 (c. 30), Sch. 3 para. 27(3)
Words in s. 457(1) inserted (with effect in accordance with Sch. 3 para. 30-36 of the amending Act) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2023 (c. 30), Sch. 3 para. 27(2)
S. 465B(9)(da) inserted (11.7.2023) by Finance (No. 2) Act 2023 (c. 30), s. 32(4)
Words in s. 322(5A) inserted (31.12.2023) by The Resolution of Central Counterparties (Modified Application of Corporate Law and Consequential Amendments) Regulations 2023 (S.I. 2023/1313), regs. 1(2), 12